Protect Patient Privacy Overview

/in /by

PCC includes many different tools and features to help your practice make sure a patient’s medical information is protected.

This article includes an overview of how to use and configure PCC software to ensure that patients’ PHI is only available to those with permission to view it. For each topic covered, there are links to the specific feature article elsewhere on learn.pcc.com.

Watch a Video: You can watch an overview video explaining the features in this article here: Patient Medical Record Privacy.

PCC System-Wide Protections

PCC EHR and the PCC revenue cycle management tools work hard behind the scenes to protect private health information by default.

The most obvious security measure is user logins. Every time anyone at your practice wants to view patient data, they must enter a password, which ensures that only authorized users have access to your files. Obviously this is not possible in the world of paper charting, where anyone could just walk into your office and start reading a patient’s private health information.

Beyond needing a “key” to view your data, whenever a patient’s chart is not actively being looked at, it is encrypted. Your practice’s server has an encrypted hard drive, and all backups of your data (locally and in the cloud) are also encrypted, as are the secure communication standards we use when you send a claim or receive an electronic lab test result.

Chart Audit Log

PCC automatically logs all user access to patient records.

Whenever someone at your practice even opens a chart, PCC EHR logs that activity. PCC keeps track of the date and time a chart was accessed, but also provides details about what type of “event” took place. For example, you can see which sections of the chart were accessed, modified, printed, deleted, etc., and by whom.

You can perform a quick and thorough audit by patient or employee with the PCC EHR Audit Log. You can audit a specific patient’s chart, to see everyone who has looked at that patient’s PHI, and you can audit a particular employee at your practice, to see which charts they have opened. It’s easy to run the report yourself, without outside assistance or configuration, in order to find any unauthorized access into your patient records.

Your practice can decide which users will have access to the PCC EHR Audit Log.

Configure Diagnoses and Orders to Be Private

Sometimes a patient has a sensitive diagnosis, lab, or other order, and you want to make sure that it doesn’t get pushed out to the portal or printed out on reports that mom and dad might see.

Alternatively, your practice may have a policy that specific orders (or all labs) are not released on the patient portal until the provider has spoken with the family.

How can you control whether or not diagnoses or labs appear in the patient portal or on the Patient Visit Summary?

Hide or Show an Individual Item

Every time you add a diagnosis or create any type of order, you can specify whether it will be shared on patient-facing materials.

For example, you can hide sensitive items on the Medical Summary for the patient. Just click the lock icon next to the problem, allergy, or family medical history item.

Similarly, while charting a visit, you can hide a diagnosis or order by unchecking the “Include on Patient Reports” box.

Click Edit to Edit Orders: When you work with orders, you will need to be in “Edit” mode in order to access the lock checkbox.

For more information on this topic, read Hide Sensitive Diagnoses from the Patient Portal and Patient Reports, on learn.pcc.com.

Configure Sensitive Items To Be Hidden By Default

If your practice decides that a certain diagnosis or order should always be hidden (such as STD tests, for example), your practice can configure individual diagnoses or orders to be “locked” by default. Later, clinicians can adjust the order on a case-by-case basis.

Make a Diagnoses Hidden By Default

When you wish to make a diagnosis hidden by default, open the Diagnosis Configuration tool from the Tools menu.

Find the diagnosis, and double-click to edit. Uncheck the “Include on Patient Reports” box to change the default status of this diagnosis to private.


For more detailed instructions on hiding diagnoses, read the Configure Default Hidden Diagnoses section of the Hide Sensitive Diagnoses article.

Configure a Lab Order to Be Hidden By Default

You can use the Lab Configuration tool to set whether or not a lab order will be visible on reports and the Patient Portal by default.

Open the Lab Configuration tool from the Tools menu, and double-click on the lab that you want to make private.

Uncheck the “Include on Patient Reports” box to make this lab “locked” by default.


For more help on configuring lab orders, read the Lab Configuration article on learn.pcc.com.

Hide Lab Orders Until They Are Reviewed: Some practices use the above setting to make all lab orders “hidden” from the Patient Visit Summary and patient portal (My Kid’s Chart) by default. After the clinician reviews the results with the family (for example), the practice edits the lab order and clicks the “Include on Patient Reports” checkbox. That makes the single instance of that lab visible for the family.

Hidden Orders and Diagnoses Appear on Time of Service Receipts: An order or diagnosis that is hidden will still appear on a time of service receipt, if it is generated after the charges have been posted.

Configure Other Orders to Be Hidden By Default

For all other types of orders, such as medical tests or referrals, you will use the Protocol Configuration tool to make them private by default.

Open the Protocol Configuration tool from the Tools menu, and select the Component Builder.

Find the relevant order component, and double-click to open it. Within the component, locate the specific order you want to make private, and double-click on it to edit.


Uncheck the “Include on Patient Reports” box to hide this order on reports and the Patient Portal by default.

For more help with configuring and editing orders, read The Component Builder, on learn.pcc.com.

Teenagers and Privacy

A common privacy issue for pediatric practices is what to do about teenage patients. Depending on your state or region’s regulations, emancipation age can vary. PCC can handle whatever age your patients’ medical records become their own.

Teenagers and the Patient Portal

PCC’s patient portal, MyKidsChart, has an age-based privacy setting that you can configure to whatever age is appropriate for your practice. When a patient turns that age, all users who have not been granted specific permission will no longer have patient portal access to that patient’s records.

Open the Patient Portal Configuration tool, and use the Configuration tab of the Patient Portal Manager to set your practice’s emancipation age.

Portal access is based on an e-mail address that you’ve verified with the parent or patient. You can create a portal account for the patient and grant only them access to their account to review medical records.

Within the parent or guardian’s portal account, you can manually indicate that they should still have access to the patient’s portal account for some reason, even after the patient reaches the emancipation age. Maybe you have a written agreement where they are defined as a patient representative, for example.

To override the emancipation age for a patient, use the Administration tab of the Patient Portal Manager, select “Manage Portal User”, and find the parent or guardian’s account.

Within the column that says “Hide at age < >” click on the “Yes” to turn it to a “No”. This will prohibit the patient’s file from being hidden from this portal user when the patient reaches emancipation age.

Basically, you can set your practice’s default emancipation age, and then your staff can set medical record access on a patient-by-patient basis.

For more information about setting portal account permissions, read the My Kid’s Chart User Account Administration article on learn.pcc.com.

Portal Messages are Private

As detailed above, a practice can designate which portal accounts can review patient medical information, no matter what the age.

Any patient, parent, or other authorized individual can have a portal account and use it to communicate with the practice. Even after a parent can no longer see a patient’s records, they can continue to send and receive portal messages, and a patient can communicate privately with the practice with their own portal account.

All Messages are Private: Portal message conversations are not stored in any email account. Messages between the practice and a portal account holder can not be read by any other My Kid’s Chart user, even those users who have access to the same patient’s records. For example, two parents and a teenage patient, with three separate portal accounts, will not see each others’ communication with the practice. For more information, see the Patient Portal User Guide.

“Parent” Accounts for Patients

If a parent’s insurance company is billed for a patient’s visit, they may see that visit on their EOB from the insurance company, or on their bill.

If a patient’s visit should never be visible to a patient’s parent or guardian, is there anything you can do to prevent them from seeing it?

PCC is a family-based record system. That means that a patient’s medical record and the billing record are separate. When appropriate, you have the option of giving the patient their own account record. Within the Demographics section of their chart, you can create and assign an account for the patient so that they are their own guarantor. When that happens, all future charges will only be visible on their account.

For more detailed instructions on creating an reassigning accounts, read Add New Patients and Accounts on learn.pcc.com.

Some practices instead elect to create a second, private patient chart to track sensitive visits for patients who are not yet adults. It works, but you need to have a practice-wide understanding of the policy, and train your clinicians on the workflow.

Confidential Communication Preference

You can define a patient’s communication preference, recording exactly who in the family should be contacted and how. This is another way to ensure private correspondence with your teenage patients.

The Confidential Communication Preference component is located right on the Demographics screen.

Confidential Notes

PCC EHR has a chart-wide component called Confidential Notes, which can be on the Medical Summary or right on the visit chart note. This is a place that clinicians can use to write notes that are only meant to be seen by certain staff.

Information stored in the Confidential Notes component will not print out on any reports, including the Health Information Summary, Patient Visit Summary, or the Summary of Care Record. It will not appear anywhere in the patient portal.

The Confidential Notes component is collapsed by default, which means that any notes that have been written do not appear visibly on the screen when a chart is opened. The person reviewing the chart will have to click on the arrow to expand the note section, and read whatever has been written.


PCC EHR logs anytime someone opens or edits a patient’s Confidential Notes. Contact PCC Support if you need to audit this log.

For more information on this topic, read Confidential Notes and Other Confidential Fields, on learn.pcc.com.

Clinical Alerts

You can use Clinical Alerts to warn your staff about privacy issues or a patient’s emancipation status.

For a special privacy concern, or if you just want to make sure that staff is aware of the patient’s age when accessing their record, PCC’s Clinical Alerts feature can trigger a reminder whenever the patient’s chart is opened.

To learn more about how to set up and use clinical alerts for your practice, read the Clinical Alerts article on learn.pcc.com.

Office Policy Considerations Around Privacy

  • Access Permissions Form on File: It’s a good idea to have a signed “access permissions” form from patients and families that you keep on file, import it and keep it in the Documents section of the patients chart. If you are establishing a patient representative you should have a form for that and have that signed and placed in the patient’s chart as well.
  • Emancipation Age: You should have a practice policy on the Emancipation Age for patient portal access, with an explanation of exceptions around special-needs patients and other circumstances.
  • Know Your Tools: Your clinicians all need to know how the “Display on Patient Reports” checkbox and lock toggle work. One administrator at your practice can configure the defaults for sensitive labs and diagnoses, but it is important for clinicians to be able to review what’s happening in the moment, and to use these tools when charting, as needed.
  • Know Your HIPAA Protections: Have you done a Security Risk Assessment? Who is your practice’s HIPAA officer, and what’s your written policy?
  • Your State or Region’s Rules: Finally, your practice needs to know your state or region’s rules, laws and requirements. What are the laws around “patient representatives”? At what age does a parent need permission to access their child’s records? PCC has the tools to help you make it happen.

How to Adjust Computer Workstation Font Sizes

/in /by

When you set up a computer workstation at your practice, you may wish to change the system-wide font sizes used by your operating system.

PCC’s software and tools automatically adjust font sizes and software interface elements to fit your screen. PCC’s fall 2017 update (PCC 8.1) improved that capability, which means you may want to make changes to your workstation after your update.

Read the sections below to learn how to access and make changes to a computer workstation’s display font.

Change Display Settings in Microsoft Windows

Use the Display controls to adjust your Windows workstation’s system-wide font size.

Windows 10




PCC recommends you start with the 125% or 150% setting. If you used a larger percentage, you may want to reduce the percentage after your PCC 8.1 update.

Windows 7 and Windows 8



PCC recommends you start with the Medium or Larger setting. If you used a larger percentage, you may want to reduce the percentage after your PCC 8.1 update.

Change Display Settings in Apple MacOS

Use the “Displays” settings panel to adjust your MacOS workstation’s system-wide font size.



In most circumstances, the “Default for display” option will produce the best results. You can experiment with the “Scaled” option if you have trouble reading your screen.

Contact PCC Support

If you are experiencing other problems with fonts or graphics in PCC EHR or any of PCC’s products or services, contact PCC Support. PCC has additional tools and options, and they can also help you make hardware purchasing decisions.

Create Custom Medications and Sentences in PCC eRx

/in /by

Your practice can create custom entries to standardize complex instructions for common medications and simplify the process of prescribing non-standard medications, supplies, equipment, and services.

Trying to create a custom entry for a compound? Jump to this section.

Video Coming Soon!: A soon-to-be published video details how you can create custom medications and sentences in PCC eRx.

Create a Custom Medication

Follow the procedure below to create a new custom medication in PCC eRx.

Search For Your Desired Drug or Item and Click “Full Product Search”

Before you create a custom medication item, double-check that it isn’t available already. You may have already searched, but a few key tips may help you find what you are looking for.

Click 'Full Product Search', Especially For DMEs: PCC eRx drug search results are based on a patient’s age. If you are looking for a drug that does not have age specificity, you may need to use “Full Product Search” to find it. Additionally, DMEs do not have age restrictions. You will always need to click “Full Product Search” to find equipment and most supplies.


Use Fewer Words For a Broader Search: If you type in the full drug name or trade name, you may miss a character or enter a limited search that prevents you from finding what you are looking for. Start searching with a single word or drug name for a broader result.

Open PCC eRx and Click “Administration”

When you are ready to create a new medication item, visit the PCC eRx queue or the PCC eRx section of a patient’s chart and click “Administration”.

You must be a PCC eRx administrator to proceed. For help, contact your PCC Client Advocate.

Click “Custom Medications”

Find and click the “Custom Medications” link on the right-most column.

Enter a Description and Route

What’s the drug or medication that you wish to prescribe? Enter the name in the Description field and select a Route.

What Should Be In the Description?: The description is the name that will appear on the prescription bottle. Typically, it would include both the drug and form, or in some other way specify what is being prescribed. Later on, you will create one or several custom sentences that will define how the drug should be taken.

Select DME or Compound

Check the “DME” checkbox if the custom item is a supply. Check the “Compound” checkbox if the custom item is a medication.

Required: If you do not click one of these options, the prescription cannot be sent to a pharmacy electronically.

Click “Add Custom First Step Item” to Save Your Selections

Click to add your custom item. It will appear in a list.


Click “Administration” then “Custom Medication Sentences”

Now you are ready to create the dosing instructions for your custom medication.

Click on the “Administration” tab to exit the Custom Medications screen, then click the “Custom Medication Sentences” link.


Search For the Medication on the Custom Sentences Screen

Search for your custom medication at the top of the Custom Sentences screen.

Custom Sentences for Existing Medications: You don’t have to search for a custom medication on this screen; you can search for any drug and create a custom sentence for it. However, PCC recommends prescription favorites as a faster, more intuitive way to create custom sentences for existing medications.

Select the Medication and Click “Add Custom Medication Item”

Select the medication, then click the “Add Custom Medication Item…” link.


If this is not your first time setting up custom sentences for this drug, or you are creating a custom sentence for a drug that already exists on your PCC system, you will see a list of other custom sentences already tied to the medication above the link to add a new custom medication item.

Enter Dosing Statement Details

Next, enter any dosing statement details.

For a DME and some unusual compounds, you might choose to check “Instructions Only” to remove fields that are not relevant.

Your Prescriber Can Change Details As You Prescribe: Keep in mind that you are creating a new custom medication listing that will appear in search results. Your prescribers can still select your new item and then make changes to frequency, duration, or any other field as they prescribe.

Click “Save” to See Your New Medication Item

Click “Save” to finish. You will see your new custom medication item(s) listed on the screen.

Test Your New Medication Items

Next, you should test your medication to see if it behaves as you expect. You can open a test patient and create the prescription without sending it.

Delete Custom Medications and Sentences

You can delete erroneous or unneeded custom medications and sentences in the Administration section of PCC eRx.

Delete a Custom Medication

Click the “Custom Medications” link on the PCC eRx Administration page, then click the red “X” next to the item.


Delete a Custom Medication Sentence

Click the “Custom Medication Sentences” link on the PCC eRx Administration page, then search for the medication that is tied to the sentence you want to delete.


Select the medication, then click the “remove custom” link beside the custom sentence you want to delete.

Compounds

While it is possible to create your own custom compound entries, please note that they will be saved as instructions-only prescriptions and will not be subjected to drug safety checking.

Instead, try using the standard entries for Magic Mouthwash and All-Purpose Nipple Ointment (ANPO) already offered in PCC eRx. These entries contain itemized lists of ingredients, their ratios, and are subjected to drug safety checking.

If the “recipes” included in these standard entries aren’t quite right or there are other compounds you wish to have added to the standard medication list, contact PCC Support.

On request, PCC may be able to manually add additional compounds to your practice-wide list of medications that can undergo drug safety checking and streamline communication to pharmacy staff.

How to Respond to Record Requests with PCC EHR

/in /by

As a pediatric practice, you receive requests for medical information about your patients on a regular basis. Sometimes you are asked to transfer a patient’s chart, or export all known medical information, or in some other way send a patient’s records to a third party.

You know best whether you can satisfy the request with an overview of the patient’s chart, or if it will be necessary to disclose specific notes from some or all of the patient’s visits.

PCC has put together this guide to show the various ways you can satisfy record requests using PCC EHR, and our recommendations for when to use each format.

Send a C-CDA file via Direct Secure Messaging

When you refer or transfer a patient to another provider, PCC recommends sending a C-CDA.

Request coming from the family?: Families who are registered with the Patient Portal can download a Summary of Care whenever they like. They don’t even need to ask you! If you haven’t done so already, considering sharing the My Kid’s Chart User’s Guide with your patients’ families.

A C-CDA is an xml-formatted document, which means that it is machine-readable, and allows for data to be exported from one EHR and imported into another.

You can transmit the Summary of Care as a C-CDA, from PCC EHR to any other clinician or practice via Direct Secure Messaging. The Summary of Care provides an overview of the patient’s medical history.

What Data is Included in the C-CDA?

The following information is included in the C-CDA file, in both human and machine-readable format:

  • Allergies
    • Allergies component – active, inactive, and resolved allergies
    • PCC eRx Allergies component – active allergies
  • Medications
    • Brand name, strength, route, form, start date, stop date
  • Problem List
    • Problem Name, SNOMED code, Onset Date, Status
  • History of Procedures
    • Populated by Orders
    • Order Name, SNOMED code, Description, Date ordered, Status
    • Canceled orders are not shown
  • Relevant Diagnostic Tests and/or Laboratory Data
    • Result Type, SNOMED code, Description, Date, Status, Result
  • Vital Signs
    • Vital Type, Value, Unit, Date Taken
    • Vitals types included: Height, Length, Weight, BP (Diastolic and Systolic), Temperature, Heart Rate (Pulse), Respiratory Rate, Head Circumference, O2 Saturation, BMI
  • Social History
    • Date Recorded, SNOMED code, Status
    • Smoking Status taken from most recently documented encounter
  • Care Plan
    • Date, Status, Goals, Actions, Next Steps, Team Members
  • History of Immunizations
    • Vaccine, Date, Site, Status
    • Canceled immunizations are not shown
  • Encounters
    • Encounter Type, Performer (Provider), Location, Date, Diagnoses
  • Referrals
    • Type, Date, Status
  • Payers
    • Insurance Policy, Certificate, Group, Phone

    Additionally, there are several pieces of information that are machine-readable only:

    • Billed ICD-10 codes related to visit diagnoses
    • Primary care provider tax ID
    • Primary care provider taxonomy code

    To learn how to generate a Summary of Care Record and transmit it as a C-CDA, read the Summary of Care Report article.

    For information about setting up, registering, or using Direct Secure Messaging, read the Direct Secure Messaging article.

    Invite Requesters to Retrieve Summary of Care Records Themselves

    If you want to reduce the number of record requests made to your office, you can sign up to allow other healthcare providers to electronically request and retrieve records from your PCC system on-demand. This function in PCC EHR is called clinical document exchange.

    What Data Gets Shared?

    If your practice participates in clinical document exchange, the patient’s most up-to-date Summary of Care Record is made available and contains information such as:

    • Demographic data (Name, D.O.B., Address)
    • Clinical data
    • Diagnoses
    • Allergies
    • Medications
    • History of Procedures
    • Diagnostic and Laboratory Test Results
    • History of Immunizations
    • Insurance Policies

    Customize the Summary of Care Record: Your practice can configure which information is included in patients’ Summary of Care Records. Click here to learn how.

    To enable clinical document exchange, and to learn more about its benefits and how it works, read Clinical Document Exchange.

    Export the Patient’s Whole Chart

    If a patient is transferring out of your practice, a specialist needs in-depth notes, or an insurance carrier is requesting a complete chart, you can export the patient’s full chart from PCC EHR.

    Stop and Think Before You Export: The patient chart export exposes all of the Protected Health Information (PHI) stored in your system for a particular patient. This information is protected by law and sharing it inappropriately may harm the patient, their caregivers, you, and your practice. Before you export a patient’s whole chart, obtain consent from the patient and share only the minimum amount of information required.

    Print or Export Chart Notes and Chart Sections for Specialized Needs

    If you need to provide a patient’s chart notes for a particular date range, or if certain records are requested that are not part of the C-CDA (such as growth charts), you can print individual records to a paper file or “print” them as a PDF file.

    Print Chart Notes for Specific Dates

    You can print or export individual chart notes from the Visit History component of a patient’s chart.

    Navigate to the Patient’s Visit History

    Open the patient’s chart to the the Visit History component, within the History section.

    Select a Visit and Click “Print”

    Highlight the visit date of the chart note you want to print, from the Visit History Index table.

    Click the “Print” button to print a paper copy of the chart note, or to print a PDF.

    Repeat As Needed

    Repeat step 2 for each chart note you need to print.

    Print Immunization History

    You can print a record of the patient’s immunizations from the Patient Visit Summary Report.

    Open the Patient Visit Summary Report

    With the patient’s chart still open, select “Patient Visit Summary” from the Reports menu. The Visit Summary will default to the most recent encounter.

    Select Options and Click “Print”

    To print only a record of immunizations, un-check all of the boxes except for the demographic information needed, and “Immunization History”.

    Click the “Print” button to print a paper copy of the modified report.

    Print Growth Charts

    A patient’s Growth Chart(s) can be printed from the Growth Charts component of the chart.

    Navigate to the Patient’s Growth Charts

    Open the patient’s chart to the the Growth Charts component, within the History section.

    Select a Growth Chart and Click “Print”

    Select the growth chart to use from the drop-down menu. The default selection will be based on the patient’s sex and age.

    Click the “Print” button to print a paper copy of the selected growth chart.

    Repeat If Needed

    Repeat step 2 if you need to print more than one growth chart for the patient.

    Print Documents

    Documents can also be printed from the History section of the patient’s chart.

    Navigate to the Patient’s Documents

    Open the patient’s chart to the the Documents component, within the History section.

    Select a Document and Click “Print”

    Click on the arrow next to a category to expand and show documents in that category. Highlight the document you want to print.

    Click the “Print” button.

    Note: You can also print documents with their notes, print only the notes, or print the document by itself. Select a document and click on the File menu to see your printing options.

    Repeat As Needed

    Repeat step 2 for as many documents as you need to print.

    Unsure of How Much Data to Send?

    PCC recommends that you always start by sending a C-CDA, unless the request is clearly asking for more.

    The “Minimum Necessary” HIPAA standard requires that PHI disclosure should be limited to the minimum amount needed by the receiving party.

    If you are not sure whether a C-CDA will suffice, you can send a letter along with the C-CDA, letting the receiving party know that they can request additional information, as they feel is needed.

    You can use PCC EHR to create a form letter, so that you don’t have to rewrite the letter every time you send out a C-CDA. Read about form letters here.

    Utilize the PCC EHR Audit Log

    If you need to see a detailed record of everything that has happened with a patient’s chart (who has viewed it, every component accessed, and by whom), use the PCC EHR Audit Log.

    Read The PCC EHR Audit Log to learn more about this report.

PCC 8.1 Release

/in /by

In October of 2017, PCC will release version 8.1 of our electronic charting and practice management software to all PCC users.

The PCC 8.1 release includes an update to the look and feel of PCC EHR, along with a massive under-the-hood maintenance update. While much of this release’s work-hours were spent updating our programming infrastructure, PCC 8.1 also includes a new option for personal balances in the patient portal and customizable reports in PCC EHR.

Watch a Video: Want to watch a video summary of everything in this release? CLICK HERE

Read below to learn more, and contact PCC Support for information about these new features or about any PCC product or service.

PCC EHR’s New Look and Feel

PCC EHR has been updated to appear the same on your screen, whether you access it from work or home, from a Mac or a PC.

With new graphic elements and a brighter, clearer presentation, PCC EHR screens are easier to read and review.

New PCC EHR Icon

The first thing you will notice when you use PCC EHR is that the “blue man” is gone. The new desktop icon is consistent with PCC’s logo colors and design.


The new icon will also appear on the login screen and the PCC Home button.

Where Did EHR Client Go?: On Apple computers, if you formerly clicked on “ehrclient” to launch PCC EHR, you will notice the new icon with a new name of “PCC EHR”.

New Fonts and Color Scheme Easier to Read and Use

PCC EHR now uses standard, embedded fonts across all operating systems, for a consistent experience on any platform.

The font size has been increased and the background color has been lightened to give PCC EHR a brighter, sharper overall appearance.

Find Components More Easily

PCC 8.1 makes PCC EHR’s component blue title-highlighting feature clearer and more visible than before. When you click on an anchor navigation button for a chart note or other “ribbon” in PCC EHR, it is now easier to quickly identify where the component appears on the screen.

Families Can Review Balances in the Patient Portal

Personal balance information can now be displayed in the patient portal, reminding your patients to pay you.

When enabled by your practice, the portal will display the personal balance for the selected billing account.


What charges will show up?: The information shown in the portal is not necessarily reflective of all charges for the billing account. Charges will only be included if there is an unpaid balance on the visit. Pending insurance will be displayed if there is also a personal amount due. Credit balances will not be displayed. Portal users will not see any data for patients who are not connected to their portal account, or who have privacy enabled.

Turn on Personal Balance for an Individual Portal User

You can decide for each portal user whether it is appropriate to show the personal balance for the patient(s) they are connected to in the portal.

When you set up or edit a portal user’s account, you can select a billing account that is associated with the patient(s) who the portal user is connected to.

The selection defaults to “Do not display balance”. Users will only see the balance if the portal administrator decides to change the selection.

In the above example, the portal administrator decided not to have Wilma’s portal account include personal balance information, since the billing account was in Fred’s name. If the practice chose to show balance information, Wilma would only see the charges that were outstanding for Pebbles, since Dino’s name is in italics (indicating that his information will not be visible to Wilma).

Turn off the Personal Balance Feature for All Portal Users

If your practice decides not to display personal balance information on your patient portal, you can turn this feature off.

To disable this feature, un-check the Personal Balance selection in the Configuration tab of the Patient Portal Manager.

Create Custom PCC EHR Reports

You can now generate and save custom reports in PCC EHR.

To create a custom report, click the “Customize Report” button at the bottom of any existing report.

Here you can give the report a new title and description, and select which criteria you want to appear on the report. Selection boxes here are sticky, so any options you choose on the Customize Report screen will be the default selections when you run the report.

When you have made your selections, click “Preview”.

In this report preview, you can select which columns will display by default when you run the new report. You can also click “Back” to make any adjustments. To save the new report, click “Save As”.



Once you have saved your new report, you can run it just like any other report. It will appear in the Report Library listed alphabetically along with all other reports.

Editing and Deleting Existing Reports

You can edit or delete any custom report. When you open the report, click the “Customize Report” button.


New Patient Immunization Administration Summary Report

Use the new Patient Immunization Administration Summary report to find all patients who may need to complete a series of immunizations.



In this example, we’ve run a report on all patients from 6 months to 8 years old who have been in in the last year, but haven’t had or completed their recommended flu vaccinations. You could also run reports to find patients with an incomplete vaccine series.

HPV Merck Program: You could use the Patient Immunization Administration Summary report for HPV vaccines to identify patients for the Merck “Health In Focus” program.

Shotcount: Some practices may have worked with their CA to run the shotcount script to get some of this same information. The Patient Immunization Administration Summary report replaces that process.

Updates to PCC eRx During the PCC 8.1 Release Cycle

The PCC 8.0 release included the all-new PCC eRx. Since the official PCC 8.0 release, PCC has rolled out dozens of updates, adjustments, and quick fixes to bugs that you helped us find. Below are some of the PCC eRx updates and fixes that arrived on your system between PCC 8.0 and PCC 8.1.

May and June

Highlights from PCC eRx patches delivered in May and June include:

  • Faster: After the PCC 8.0 release, we tracked down many performance issues, including a “slow typing” effect and slow Rx Queue performance. We were able to improve PCC eRx performance without a full update.

  • Renewal Requests for Controlled Substances: Authorized prescribers can now approve or deny EPCS renewal requests. They will appear on your Rx Queue.

  • DNTF: The “Deny, New Request to Follow” feature for renewal requests now works as expected for electronic renewal requests on your Rx Queue. Note that DNTF does not yet work for EPCS renewals, so for now please deny and then create a new Rx instead for controlled substances.

  • Rx Queue History Update: When you review the Rx Queue history, you can now see more information. You’ll see details for denials or DNTF, including the patient, provider, action, and denial reason. You can also review the date a renewal request was made and responded to, and any notes to the pharmacy.

  • Patient Mismatch for Renewals: PCC eRx prompts you to find a patient whose name doesn’t quite match a renewal request. This process now works better and allows you to approve a pending refill prescription.

  • Better EPCS Token Validation: The EPCS ID-Proofing process was improved with better token ID validation.

  • Editing Finalized Prescriptions: It is now impossible to accidentally edit a prescription that has already been finalized and sent.

  • New Configuration Option for Discontinuing Medications: Your practice can decide whether you want to be prompted for the “reason for deleting” a medication, a message that appears when you delete a medication from a patient’s record. Contact your PCC Client Advocate for help with this option or other PCC eRx configuration options.

  • Support of Ohio Drug Reporting Requirements: Ohio pediatric practices can now generate a Daily Prescription Report from the RxQueue. They can use this report to meet Ohio’s 2-factor identification requirement.

  • Fix for eRx Allergies Migrated from DrFirst: If a patient had an allergy listed in the previous prescription system, and that allergy was updated or changed, under certain circumstances those changes would not appear on the patient’s Medical Summary screen. This no longer occurs.

  • Improved Support for Pharmacy-Initiated Renewal Requests: Under certain circumstances, it was not possible to approve a renewal request. PCC has improved how this function works.

  • Printing: PCC made numerous improvements to printed prescriptions between the 8.0 and 8.1 releases, including alignment and placement of practice name and margins.

July

Highlights from the 7/10 and 8/1 PCC eRx patches include:

  • Improved Support For Imported Allergy Records: Under certain circumstances, allergy data from the prior eRx system (DrFirst) was not appearing correctly. In addition, due to DrFirst’s data format, manual updates to those allergies might not sync to PCC EHR. PCC fixed these problems and updated affected clients.

  • Printing EPCS Prescriptions in Ohio: For a brief period after a previous patch, EPCS prescriptions could not be printed in Ohio. This issue was resolved with a quick patch.

  • Renewal Requests and the SurescriptsRejectionValidationFailed Error: Some renewal requests from pharmacies could not be approved, accompanied by a “SurescriptsRejectionValidationFailed”. This issue has been fixed.

  • Pharmacy Name Missing from Review & Sign Component: Under certain circumstances, the pharmacy name was not available when hovering over a prescription in the Review and Sign component. Now it is.

  • Improved Rx Queue Refresh: PCC has improved how the Rx Queue counter and list refreshes.

  • Retail Rx Hx Results: Due to a mismatch in identifying a pediatric practice’s location NPI, Retail Rx histories sometimes showed very few results, particularly for Provider Agents and Clinical Staff. This has been corrected.

  • PCC eRx 'asynchronous error': When a laptop’s internet connection failed, users would sometimes see a “An asynchronous error has occurred while processing your request” message. This has been corrected.

  • Formulary Info Absent: PCC eRx has improved eligibility and formulary matching and will now display formulary information when available.

  • Dispense Quantity: Under certain circumstances, incorrect dispense quantity could appear on a prescription. This no longer occurs.

  • Prescription Component Update Improved: Under certain circumstances, a patient’s prescription component would not update immediately due to a logjam of interface requests. This no longer occurs.

  • Prescription Interface Restoring After Down Time: If a practice’s connection to the eRx service was interrupted for more than an hour, it could encounter problems dealing with the message backlog afterwards. This process now works better.

  • Improved Prescription Audit report: Under certain circumstances, the Rx Audit and Audit Log reports would fail to run. This no longer occurs.

  • Improved Pharmacy Searching: The pharmacy search field is now more responsive. The search field also now accepts unusual characters.

August and September

Highlights from patches delivered in August and September include:

  • Prescription Errors Could Cause a Backlog of Updates: If a prescription was unsuccessful for some reason, prescription information could stop synching back to the patient’s chart in PCC EHR. This will no longer happen.

  • Inaccurate 'Patient Record Modified By Another User' Message: Prescribers would occasionally see an error message in PCC eRx stating that, “Patient record has prescriptions that have been modified by another user. Click Ok to reload the page.” This message was appearing when it should not. This issue has been fixed.

  • Renewal Requests with Unspecified Quantity: Renewal requests for prescriptions marked PRN, or with a dispense quantity of “Unspecified”, could result in incomplete prescriptions in the Review and Sign component that can not be completed. This issue has been fixed.

  • The Sleepy Search: Repeating a Search for a Medication Appeared to Freeze: If a prescriber searched for a medication and then repeated the search, under certain circumstances the search would appear to hang or freeze, unless they typed a different search. This no longer occurs.

  • Improved Pharmacy Search Results: Some practices had problems searching for pharmacies, due to a set of missing zip codes. We have added the new zip code information to PCC eRx’s zip code library, which will improve pharmacy searching.

  • Norvelt Pharmacy Rejections: Under certain circumstances, a code error caused Norvelt (and possibly other pharmacies) to reject electronic prescriptions. This no longer occurs.

  • Duplicate Strengths When Renewing From History: When a user renewed a prescription from the patient’s Prescription Hx or Medication Hx, it was possible to click on options in such a way that the strength appeared twice in the prescription. This will no long occur.

  • Incorrect Dispense Quantity: For certain medication forms (such as inhalers, patches, and pumps), conversions between dosing forms could occasionally cause the wrong dispense quantity to be sent to pharmacies. This no longer occurs.

More Updates Soon!: PCC’s eRx team continues to monitor and troubleshoot errors, large and small, and we will update this list to reflect the latest news of patches in the PCC 8.0 to PCC 8.1 release cycle. If you are experiencing any issues with PCC eRx, chat with your client advocate and let us know!

For more information about PCC eRx, visit PCC’s library of PCC eRx training videos and documentation. We add new eRx videos and materials every month.

Global Opt-In For Text and Phone Notifications

If your practice uses Patient Notifications to send families text and phone messages about upcoming appointments and other issues, you will no longer need to have them “opt-in” with a text message before they can receive messages.

PCC is transitioning practices to use global opt-in during the PCC 8.1 release cycle. For more information, you can read PCC’s Notify Update Announcement Letter, and for more about best practices for handling consent-to-contact, read Best Practices for Use of Automated Communications. Contact your PCC Client Advocate if you have any questions.

PCC EHR “Under the Hood” Infrastructure Update

The “biggest” new feature in PCC 8.1 is mostly invisible: a program infrastructure update for PCC EHR.

This update improves PCC EHR’s stability and paves the way for new features and improvements in the coming year.

There are also some minor improvements you may notice right away:

  • Video Audio from Newsfeed: When you click to view a PCC video from inside the PCC Newsfeed, audio now plays correctly for Apple Macintosh and Windows users.

  • Cloud Components Display Improved: PCC 8.1 includes a heavily updated web engine, which improves display and rendering of all cloud-based components of PCC EHR, including tools like Patient Education, PCC eRx, and patient portal administration.

  • Better Support for High DPI ('Retina') Computer Screens: The PCC 8.1 infrastructure update includes improvements to onscreen rendering and support of high resolution screens.

  • Improved Security Options: The infrastructure changes in PCC 8.1 provide PCC EHR with tools it can use to improve security and adapt to upcoming security standards.

2013 Apple OS X 10.9 No Longer Supported: PCC 8.1 does not support the 2013 Mac OSX 10.9 operating system. If you have Apple Macintosh workstations in your practice that run OS X 10.9, you should run a software update before the PCC 8.1 release. MacOS updates are free and can be performed over the internet through the App store application.


New and Updated Interfaces Available in PCC 8.1

With each release, PCC’s Interoperability team expands and updates PCC’s direct connections, partnerships, and integrations with insurance payers, immunization registries, and more. Here are the interoperability updates for PCC 8.1:

  • New and Updated Immunization Interfaces: As part of the PCC 8.1 release, PCC updated or developed new immunization registry interfaces for Ohio (OHIIS), Texas (ImmTrac), New Jersey (NJIIS), and Pennsylvania (PASIS).

  • New Clinical Interfaces in PCC EHR: PCC developed a new lab interface with Princeton Medical Center, who can now send electronic test results directly to PCC EHR. In addition, PCC updated our clinical data interfaces with Wellcentive and Valence Health.

  • New Eligibility Interfaces: PCC developed new real-time insurance eligibility interfaces with Western Southern Life, Meritain Health, and GEHA. PCC also updated our eligibility interfaces with BCBS of Kansas, Centene, and Blue Cross Centennial. You can view patient eligibility information during patient check-in as well as in the Eligibility (elig) program.


If your practice would like to take advantage of these connections, or you have another interface need, contact your PCC Client Advocate.

ICD-10 2018 Update

On September 17th, 2017, PCC will update all PCC products and services to include the 2018 ICD-10 descriptions and codes. Your practice will be ready for the 2018 ICD-10 code changes, which take effect on 10/01/2017.

The ICD-10 update includes new codes for Neonatal encephalopathy, risk of dental caries, and other new codes and revisions to codes your practice may use. PCC’s certified coder, Jan Blanchard, has collected a list of interesting codes for pediatricians. She will share her findings and answer questions in her regular monthly coding weblabs.

New Codes of Interest to Pediatricians

F50.82 Avoidant/restrictive food intake disorder P29.30 Pulmonary hypertension of newborn P29.38 Other persistent fetal circulation P78.84 Gestational alloimmune liver disease
P83.81 Umbilical granuloma P83.88 Other specified conditions of integument specific to newborn P91.811 Neonatal encephalopathy in diseases classified elsewhere P91.819 Neonatal encephalopathy, unspecified
P91.88 Other specified disturbances of cerebral status of newborn Q53.111 Unilateral intraabdominal testis Q53.112 Unilateral inguinal testis Q53.13 Unilateral high scrotal testis
Q53.211 Bilateral intraabdominal testes Q53.212 Bilateral inguinal testes Q53.23 Bilateral high scrotal testes R06.03 Acute respiratory distress
R39.83 Unilateral non-palpable testicle R39.84 Bilateral non-palpable testicles T14.91XA Suicide attempt, initial encounter T14.91XD Suicide attempt, subsequent encounter
T14.91XS Suicide attempt, sequela Z71.82 Exercise counseling Z91.841 Risk for dental caries, low Z91.842 Risk for dental caries, moderate
Z91.843 Risk for dental caries, high Z91.849 Unspecified risk for dental caries

Deleted (Replaced with greater specificity) Codes of Interest to Pediatricians

N63 Unspecified lump in breast (laterality, quadrant) P83.8 Other specified conditions of integument specific to newborn (specific condition) P91.8 Other specified disturbances of cerebral status of newborn (specific condition)
Q53.11 Abdominal testis, unilateral (location) Q53.21 Abdominal testis, bilateral (location) T14.91 Suicide attempt (encounter)

Revised Code Descriptions of Interest to Pediatricians

F41.0 Panic disorder [episodic paroxysmal anxiety] Q82.2 Congenital cutaneous mastocytosis Z68.1 Body mass index (BMI) 19.9 or less, adult Z79.890 Hormone replacement therapy

As always, PCC software will intelligently implement the new code set changes. If your billers attempt to bill with a retired ICD-10 code, they’ll see a warning when they attempt to post charges (in checkout) and the claim will be held for review before it leaves your practice (in ecs when you generate claims).

Map Codes for Billing: After the 9/17/2017 ICD-10 patch, you may wish to review billing configuration for your diagnoses and take advantage of new ICD-10 codes. You can use the snomedmap report to review ICD-10 code changes on the codes you use, and you can open the Billing Configuration tool to configure which ICD-10 diagnoses are mapped to each SNOMED-CT description in PCC EHR.

Not Yet Ready for CQM 0024 for PCMH or Meaningful Use: One of the new 2018 ICD-10 billing codes is “Z71.82 Exercise counseling”. This code has not yet been integrated into the CQM requirement reporting and will not improve your practice’s score for the counseling element of CQM 0024, “Weight assessment and counseling for nutrition and physical activity”. For more information about how to configure PCC EHR and chart a visit in order to meet Clinical Quality Measures for PCMH recognition, read How to Chart for Each Clinical Quality Measure.

Other Feature Improvements and Bug Fixes in PCC 8.1

In addition to the features described above, PCC 8.1 includes these smaller improvements and squashed bugs.

  • Better Process for New Labs in Interfaces: When PCC EHR receives an electronic lab result that it doesn’t recognize, PCC EHR will now automatically add the order codes into your system so you can add them to a Lab Order. You can set up the lab order in the Lab Configuration tool right away, and then import the lab results to the patient’s chart. You no longer need to call PCC Support for assistance.

  • PCC EHR Report Library Search Field Improvement: If you search for a patient or for other data in a PCC EHR Report Library filter, such as the patient search in the Prescription Activity report, you can now click an “x” to erase the field and search for a new patient.

  • Visit Status Counter Refresh: Under certain circumstances, the Visit Status Counters in the lower-right corner of PCC EHR would not update immediately after you logged in. Now they will.

  • PCC Learn Videos Required Full Screen: On some computers, videos on learn.pcc.com would not appear until you clicked the “Full Screen” option. PCC has recompiled these videos and they will appear and play as soon as you visit the video’s page.

Macintosh Users Will Experience an Extra Minute During the Update

If you use Apple Macintosh computers in your office, your staff may notice that the installer will take a little extra time during the update.

PCC 8.1 includes easier to read fonts and colors, and the installer needs to rebuild your Macintosh’s font cache.

Contact your PCC Client Advocate or the PCC Technical Solutions Team with any questions about completing the PCC EHR update on your Mac.

Windows Users May Need to Review and Adjust Font Scaling After Your Update

The new PCC 8.1 does a better job of displaying fonts in appropriate sizes on your screen. If you or any of your colleagues have used Microsoft Windows’s built-in tools for increasing font sizes, usually found in the Display Settings control panel, you may need to make adjustments after your PCC 8.1 update.

For more information, read How to Adjust Computer Workstation Font Sizes.

Correct a Claim: How to Fix and Resubmit an Insurance Claim

/in /by

When you receive a rejection, or you have a claim or billing problem, how do you correct the encounter information and then resubmit the corrected claim? Read this article to learn how to update and resubmit a claim.

Make Changes, Add Reference/Resubmission Numbers, and Then Resubmit: To resolve a claim problem, typically you will edit the charges or the patient record, add the payer claim control number, and then resubmit or “rebatch” the claim. Make sure you always perform that final step–otherwise the changes you made to the charges won’t make a difference.

How to Resubmit a Single Claim

Read the procedure below to learn the basics of how to resubmit a single claim.

Update and Fix Charge, Encounter, Patient and Account Information

Confirm that patient and account information is correct and that the charges are now pending the correct insurance plan. Correct whatever errors lead to either a claim rejection, or that relate to why you need to resubmit the claim. For example, you may have needed to add an attachment, fix a procedure code, or similar.

To learn more, check out:

Run Correct Mistakes For the Account

You can run Correct Mistakes from the Need Corrections tab of the Claims tool or from the Practice Management window.

Identify Charges You Wish to Resubmit

Page down and find the charges that need to be resubmitted. You can use the F4 – Insurance Status or F5 – Visit Status function keys to review or change details about the charges. In most cases, you should identify all the charges from a visit date.

Usually: Enter a Claim Delay Reason and Payer Claim Control Number

For most resubmissions, you need to enter a Claim Delay Reason and a claim Reference Number from the payer (the Payer Claim Control Number).

Press F5 – Visit Status and select all charges in the visit, or enter the claim ID. Then press Page Down to visit the Changing Visit Information screen and enter a Claim Delay Reason and Reference Number.

In most situations, the Claim Delay Reason will be “09 Original Claim Rejected or Denied Due to a Reason Unrelated to the Billing Limitation Rules”. The correct claim Reference Number must be supplied by the payer–you can find it on an EOB or on an acknowledgement from the payer.

To learn how to find the claim Reference number, read the sections below. To learn more about Claim Delay Reason, Reference Number, and other claim information attached to charges, see Edit Accident Information Authorization Numbers and Other Visit Status Information for the Claim.

Press [F2 — Generate Claim]

Press F2 – Generate Claim. Do this for either a paper or electronic claim, as F3 prepares a claim for either HCFA printing or electronic submission.

Select Charges to Rebatch

Enter the item numbers of the charges that need to be resubmitted and press Enter. Alternatively, press F3 – Enter Claim ID or F4 – Enter Date to quickly select all charges for a given encounter.

Print a HCFA or Batch an Electronic Claim

Review the charges and press F3 – Print Claim or F4 – Batch Claim.

If More Than One Policy is Available, Select an Insurance Batch

If multiple insurance policies are available for the charges, PCC will ask you which one to use for the claim. Claim batches are used for claim configuration. Select an option and press Enter.

Review the Billing Message in the History

Whenever you generate a claim, PCC records how and when it was done in the account’s billing history.

Optionally, Enter an Account Note

If you’ve made changes to charges, payments, or the patient or family record, you may want to record your action so you can understand it later when you review billing history.

You can create a note in oops, or in PCC EHR.

Submit Claims

The next time you process claims, any newly batched electronic claims will be reprocessed and submitted.

Find the Payer Claim Control Number

The first step for any claim correction job is to find out if a claim went out already. If it did, you’ll need to find out the Payer Claim Control Number in order to resubmit the claim.

Open Correct Mistakes (oops) For Account

First, run the oops program for the patient or insurance subscriber.

Find Out if a Claim Went Out

Page down until you find the charges for the date of service. You can see all billing and claim history on the main charge history screen.

If a claim has been submitted, you will see “Aetna HCFA CLAIM ID” or “Aetna ECS CLAIM ID” or similar. After the CLAIM billing message, you will see one or more clearinghouse or payer response reports.

If a Claim Went Out, Look Up the Payer Claim Control Number

You will need the Payer Claim Control Number in order to submit a corrected claim. Press F3 – See Claim Report or Bill and enter the number next to the payer response report.

Payer response reports look different depending on the payer, but with practice you can learn to quickly identify the Payer Claim Control Number. (It may also be called the “Payer Trace Number”).

Write down the Payer Claim Control Number. You’ll need it when you resubmit.

Payments Already Posted? Unlink and Adjust Them Off

If payments and/or adjustments have already been posted against the charges, you may need to unlink the payments and post an accounting adjustment. The insurance payer will likely ask for the money refunded back as a “take back” on future ERAs. That means that a future check, for an unrelated encounter, may be reduced for the amount of a payment sent to you in error.

Follow the procedure below to post a temporary refund to hold the payments or adjustments for a claim you need to resubmit.

Open the refund Program

Run the Post Accounting Adjustments By Patient (refund) program and find the appropriate account.

Post a “Ins May Request Refund” Adjustment

Post an accounting adjustment equal to the dollar amount that is currently linked to the claim’s charges.

Can't Find the Procedure?: Your practice can have its own custom set of accounting adjustments, with names that match your usual workflow. Contact PCC Support if you need help creating new adjustment types.

Link the Payment to Your Adjustment

Open Correct Mistakes (oops) for the account and press F6 – Unlink & Relink to relink the payment to your new adjustment. To see an example, read Relink a Payment.

Record Your Actions

After you make these changes, you should record what you did on the account. You can add a visit-level note from the Insurance Status or Visit Status screens, or use the Family Editor (fame).

Later, Change to a Take-Back or Other Account Adjustment

If the insurance company requests a refund because of the claim correction, you can post a different accounting adjustment, such as “Insurance Take-Back” and relink the payment to that adjustment.

What About Adjustments From the Insurance Company?: If you are correcting a claim and there are already adjustments linked to charges you need to delete, you can safely delete them. Payments need to be accounted for later in your balance and reports, but adjustments do not.

Make Account and Charge Corrections For the Claim

After the above considerations, you are ready to update actual information that appears on a claim. Read the sections below for some examples.

Fix Incorrect Demographic and Insurance Information

Many common claim errors are due to incorrect demographic or insurance information.

You can fix patient birth date and other demographic information in PCC EHR or in the Patient Editor (notjane).

You can fix policy information in the Policies component in PCC EHR or the Insurance Policies program (policy).

Relationship to Insured: One common mistake that leads to claim rejections is an incorrect “Relationship to Insured”. For any medicaid-type plan, the relationship should be “Self”. Otherwise, in a pediatric environment PCC recommends you use the “Child” relationship.

Change the Responsible Party or Copay Amount for a Claim’s Charges

You may need to change the responsible party (an insurance policy, Medicaid, or personal) for some or all of the charges on a claim. You may also need to change the copay amount connected with the office visit charge.

You can make these changes in Correct Mistakes (oops), using F4 – Insurance Status.

Read the Change the Responsible Party for Charges article to learn more.

Change or Add a Diagnoses Code, Claim Reference Numbers, or Attachments

You may need to edit the ICD-10, claim reference numbers, or add attachments to a claim and then resubmit it.

You can make these changes in Correct Mistakes (oops), using F3 – Visit Status.

Read the Edit Diagnoses, Billing Provider, and Other Visit and Claim Information article to learn how to change encounter and claim information for charges.

Read Send Attachment Codes on PCC Claims to learn how to create and add attachment codes to a claim.

Change the Place of Service for Charges on an Encounter

You can adjust the place of service for charges on an encounter without deleting and reposting charges.

In Correct Mistakes (oops), press F5 – Visit Status and select all charges for the encounter. Then page down to the claim information screen. Update the place of service in the POS field, and press F1 to save your changes.

To learn more about this procedure, read Change an Encounter’s Billing Place of Service After Posting Charges.

Add a Procedure Modifier to a Code (-25, etc.)

Sometimes you may need to add a modifier, such as -25, to a charge. You can do that in Correct Mistakes (oops) using F5 – Visit Status.

Read the Change Procedure Code Modifiers After Posting Charges article section to learn how.

Code Missing?: If you can’t find the modified code that you need, then your practice has not set up that procedure for billing in your Procedures table. Ask your practice’s billing administrator to add the modified code as a procedure in the Table Editor (ted), with appropriate code and price.

Remove an Incorrect Billing Procedure Code From a Visit

If a visit has the wrong charge on it, you must delete the incorrect procedure in oops. You may need to first handle any payments or adjustments attached to the charge as described above. Then you can delete the incorrect charges and post the correct charges. (As noted above, if the claim has already been sent, you’ll need to include the Payer Claim Control Number for resubmission.)

Find the Charges and Note Important Claim Information

First, open the oops program for the patient or insured family member. Page down to review the charge history. Make note of the charge date, diagnoses, provider, and location. You can press F5 – Visit Status to review more detailed information about any charge. You can also use the Account History report (tater).

Claim Already Received By Payer?: As discussed in the procedures above, if the claim has already been received by the payer, you’ll need to look up the Payer Claim Control Number before proceeding. If payments and adjustments were posted, you’ll need to unlink them from the invalid charge as well. See the procedures above to learn how.

Delete the Incorrect Charges

Next, use F8 – Delete Items to delete the incorrect charges.

Post the Correct Charges in Checkout

See the procedure below.

Add a New (or Corrected) Procedure Code to a Visit

If you need to add a new procedure code to a claim, perhaps after you delete the incorrect one, follow this procedure.

Find the Visit and Note Important Claim Information

First, open the oops program for the patient or insured family member. Page down to review the charge history. Make note of the charge date. You can press F5 – Visit Status to review more detailed information about any charge. You can also use the Account History report (tater).

Claim Already Received By Payer?: As discussed in the procedures above, if the claim has already been received by the payer, you’ll also need to identify the Payer Claim Control Number before proceeding, in order to file a corrected claim. If any payments and adjustments are already posted against the charges, you’ll need to unlink them from the invalid charge as well. See the procedures above to learn how.

Post New Charges for the Visit

In the Billing History section of the patient’s chart, double-click on the encounter to edit it. Verify that you are working with the correct encounter using the information you noted above. Enter the new charges. Be sure and link procedures to the appropriate diagnoses.

Alternatively, you can post new charges in the Post Charges (chuck) program, but you will need to manually enter the encounter date, diagnoses, provider, and location.

If Already Submitted and Acknowledged By the Payer, Enter the Payer Claim Control Number

If the claim has already been acknowledged by the payer, you must add a Claim Delay Reason and the Payer Claim Control Number to all charges for the encounter. In oops, press F5 – Visit Status, select all charges, and page down to adjust the Reference Number and Claim Delay Reason fields.

See the procedure above to learn more.

Rebatch and Resubmit the Claim

After you make changes to a visit’s charges, such as adding a missing diagnosis code, deleting an incorrect procedure code, or changing the responsible party, you must re-batch the claim so it can be submitted. You should also record what happened in the account record.

If a claim was already sent, you should first add a payer claim control number to all charges.

Then you can press F2 – Generate Claim and select charges or enter a claim ID or date. The charges will be “rebatched” on your system, and the claim will be processed and submitted the next time you Submit Claims.

If you select charges from multiple encounters, PCC will create separate claims based on patient, provider, and (as of PCC 9.4) place of service.

To see additional details, read the procedure above.

PCC eRx Component Reference

/in /by

PCC eRx provides powerful tools for working with medication-related information and tasks. As in other areas of the chart in PCC EHR, these tools are organized into components. Read this article to learn detailed functions of the different components in PCC eRx.

Navigation

When you are working in PCC eRx, you can scroll through the components or jump to one in particular by clicking its anchor button.

Read the sections below to learn more about each component in PCC eRx.

Refresh Tip: As you work with a patient’s medication information, you will see vitals, problems, and other information from the patient’s chart. Click on the PCC eRx menu title to refresh the information from the chart. The menu title will appear yellow if PCC eRx detects a refresh is needed.

Patient Information

The Patient Information component shows the patient’s name, date of birth, sex, PCC number, drug allergies, and prescription insurance plans.

The demographic information reflects what is in the Demographics section of the patient’s chart.

The Allergies list reflects the known drug allergies recorded for the patient in the PCC eRx Allergies component.

The prescription insurance plan information comes from Surescripts, the vendor that facilitates digital information exchange between PCC eRx, pharmacies, and pharmacy benefit managers. Surescripts uses demographic information to query the prescription benefit managers on its network for the patient’s prescription insurance plan details.

The green plus (+) or red minus sign (–) beside each plan pharmacy type indicates whether the plan includes drug coverage for retail, mail order, specialty, and/or long term care pharmacies.

Vitals

The patient’s most recent height, weight, and blood pressure measurements appear in the PCC eRx Vitals component.

Vitals measurements could come from a mix of different visits. For example, you could have recorded the patient’s last height and weight at their last physical but taken their blood pressure today. All three measurements would appear in the Vitals component in PCC eRx as the patient’s most recent vitals measurements.

Hover Mouse For More: You can hold your mouse over a specific vital to see recent historical entries.

If your practice uses the Smoking Status component in PCC EHR, the Vitals component in PCC eRx will include smoking status information. For female patients, you will additionally have the option to indicate if the patient is pregnant or lactating.

Your practice can configure the age at which the pregnancy, lactation, and smoking status options appear.

Pharmacies

Use the PCC eRx Pharmacies component to build a list of the patient’s most commonly used pharmacies.

The list grows as you prescribe. You can also manually add and delete pharmacies from the list, and set a default pharmacy for the patient.

For more information, read the Work with Pharmacies article.

Allergies

The Allergies component in PCC eRx displays known medication allergies.

Click “Add New Allergy” to add a new allergy. You can also click “NKDA” to indicate the patient has no known drug allergies.

For more information, read the Allergies article.

Problem List

The Problem List component in PCC eRx displays problems and non-drug allergies recorded in the patient’s chart-wide Problem List and Allergies components.

Update Your Historical ICD-9 Diagnoses: PCC EHR and PCC eRx track Problem List and non-drug allergy diagnoses using the SNOMED-CT coding system. The PCC eRx interface will not display ICD-9 diagnoses listed in the patient’s chart. If you still have historical ICD-9 diagnoses listed in a patient’s Problem List or Allergies components, update those entries to use SNOMED terms instead.

Retail Rx History

Use the Retail Rx History component to look up a patient’s retail prescription history.

PCC eRx will retrieve the past two years of retail prescription history available from insurance companies and partner pharmaceutical systems.

For more information, see the Medication History article.

Prescription History

The Prescription History component displays all of the patient’s prescriptions, whether they are currently active or not.

For each prescription, you can see the Start and Stop Dates (which represent how long the supply was intended to last), Medication, Instructions, Qty/Refills, Prescriber/Agent, and other Rx Details, which include the destination pharmacy.

Use the Prescription History to review, renew, or print copies of past prescriptions.

For more information, read the Medication History article.

Medication History

The Medication History component displays the patient’s active medications, whether prescribed by you or reported by the patient or another provider. Use this component to inform your medication decisions and quickly re-prescribe medications as needed.

As soon as you prescribe a drug, it appears in the Medication History component, and is mirrored in the chart-wide Medication History component in PCC EHR.

For more information, read the Medication History article.

Prescribe

Use the Prescribe component to prescribe a new medication by searching or selecting a favorite.

For more information, read the Prescribe Medications article.

Review and Sign

After you create prescriptions with the Prescribe component, use the Review and Sign component to review sent prescriptions and optionally resend them, or finalize and send pending ones.


For more information, read the Prescribe Medications article.

Reconciliation History

The Reconciliation History component in PCC eRx displays all medication-related activity performed during the encounter. Click “View Reconciliation History Details” to expand the history.


If multiple prescriptions are created, deleted, or adjusted during a visit, you can use the reconciliation history to figure out what occurred.

Manage Immunization Lots and Track Vaccine Inventory

/in /by

PCC EHR tracks vaccine lot quantities as you add lots and administer vaccines. You can manage immunization lots, track and adjust lot amounts manually, and use reports to manage your vaccine inventory.

Read the sections below to learn about immunization lot and vaccine inventory management.

Vaccine Lot Manager Overview

When you need to add a new immunization lot to your system, change the status of an old lot, or make manual adjustments to lot amounts, open the Vaccine Lot Manager in the Tools menu.


You can also jump directly into the Vaccine Lot Manager from the Lot pull-down menu when you pull immunizations to complete an order.

In the Vaccine Lot Manager, you can add new lots, review existing lots, manually adjust dose quantities, or change the status of a lot. Filters at the bottom help you work with a specific set of lots. If a lot or its diluent has expired, you will see the lot number and expiration date in red.

CVX Codes: Each immunization’s CVX code appears in the Immunization column. Immunization registries require CVX codes. If you do not see the correct code next to an immunization, you can update your configuration in the Immunization and Disease table in Partner.

NDC Codes: NDC codes in the Vaccine Lot Manager are not used for billing. NDC codes needed for billing should still be managed through the Procedures Table.

Add a New Immunization Lot

Use the Vaccine Lot Manager to add a new immunization lot record to PCC EHR.

Barcode Scanning: PCC EHR will work with your 2D barcode scanner to scan inventory information directly into the Lot Manager. For an overview of barcode scanner functionality in the Vaccine Lot Manager, click here.

When you are ready to enter a new lot, click “Add”, or scan the 2D barcode on the vial or box.


If you entered the lot manually, enter immunization and a manufacturer. As you enter them, the CVX and MVX codes will appear. If you scanned the lot, this information will appear automatically.

Next, enter the lot number and expiration date. The expiration date can be either an exact date, or a month and year. Some immunization vials only display a month and year. Again, this information is filled out automatically when a lot is scanned in.

Next, enter one or more of the following optional lot details:

    • Funding Source: Use the Funding Source field to specify whether an immunization lot is from your practice’s private stock or from some other funding source, such as VFC immunizations supported by federal funds.

The available funding source list is based on the CDC’s recognized list of funding sources. For example, your practice may store and administer VFC immunizations, provided by federal funds, to VFC eligible patients. When you identify that information for an immunization lot, you can see the funding source when you select the lot in an immunization order.

  • Locations: If your practice has more than one location, you can enter the location where that lot should be available. If you leave the field blank, the lot will be available at all locations.

  • Diluents: Immunizations like Pentacel include a diluent. The diluent has its own discrete lot number and expiration date. You can enter the diluent information and it will be stored along with the general lot information when a vaccine is ordered and administered.

Next, you can assign a lot a status of “Available”, “Reserved”, or “Depleted”. If you do not want a new lot to be immediately available in an immunization order, mark it as “Reserved”.

Finally, use the Inventory Management box to enter the quantity of doses within the lot.

You can change the Adjustment Date and Adjustment Reason if you need to. For new lots, the date defaults to the current date and time, and the reason is pre-selected as “Increase – Shipment Received”.

Manually Adjust Dose Quantity

Whenever someone at your practice administers a shot, the vaccine lot quantity will automatically decrease.

You can manually adjust dose quantity in the Vaccine Lot Manager when you receive a shipment, are reconciling inventory, need to record wasted doses, or for any other reason.

When you need to change the quantity, select the lot from the Vaccine Lot Manager and click “Edit”. Alternatively, simply scan the 2D barcode on the box or vial to bring up the exact lot you are working with.

Within the Inventory Management section, edit the Adjustment Date (if needed), pick an Adjustment Reason from the drop-down selection of standardized reasons, and put in an amount.

Bonus Doses: Dose quantity in a vial is often not exact. Your practice may get 11 doses out of a vial that was originally defined with a quantity of 10. Administering more doses than the original dose amount will lead to a negative dose amount in PCC EHR. That’s okay! PCC EHR will allow you to administer a lot until you manually mark it as Depleted. You can fix the negative number by adding an adjustment with an Adjustment Reason of “Increase – Bonus Dose”.

Update Lot Status

The status of a lot affects whether or not you can select that lot to administer. Immunization orders will not offer you lots marked as Depleted or Reserved. Only lots that are Available will appear in immunization orders.

Select “Reserved” if the lot is set aside in the refrigerator and is not yet ready for active use.

Select “Depleted” when a lot is used up or destroyed.

Search and Filter

You can use the Lot # Search field, and the Immunization, Location and Display filters to select which lots appear in the Vaccine Lot Manager window.

For example, if you want to review all available Tdap lots at your practice, you can select “Tdap” from the Immunization filter, and “Available” from the Display filter.

If you type in part of a lot number in the Lot # Search field, the list of lots will show all matching results.

View Administration Records

The Vaccine Lot Manager includes a list of all transactions for each lot, so you can easily reconcile the vaccine inventory.


Vaccine Inventory Transaction Log in the Report Library: Users with Report Library access can use the “Open in Report Library” button to open this report in the Report Library to adjust filters, print a report, and more. See more below.

Use Reports and Worksheets to Manage Inventory

The PCC EHR Report Library includes two reports you can use to manage your vaccine inventory.

Report to Track Vaccine Inventory For a Specific Time

Use the Vaccine Inventory Transaction Log report to monitor additions and subtractions from a specific vaccine lot.



On the report, you can see how many doses were given, and to whom, as well as any adjustments that have been made, such as wasted doses or transferred inventory.

Report-style Worksheet Assists with Vaccine Reconciliation

Use the Vaccine Inventory Reconciliation Worksheet to assist you as you reconcile your vaccine inventory.



The report displays what is expected for your inventory for all vaccines. Print it out, and use the Actual Inventory and Difference columns to record and compare the actual inventory in your vaccine refrigerator with the value recorded in PCC EHR.

Best Practices For Sending Messages to Patients and Families

/in , /by

As a pediatric practice, you might send messages to your patients and families using texts (SMS), emails, patient portal messages, and phone calls. Since families provide you with their contact information for the purposes of providing healthcare, your communication is usually an allowed exception under federal regulations.

This article provides best practices and other recommendations to help you engage with your patients and improve care through communication. PCC recommends that pediatric practices follow communication best practices and abide by guidelines, even when not strictly required by law. Additionally, PCC recommends you include an explicit “consent to contact” in your practice policies.

PCC Does Not Provide Legal Advice: If your practice has concerns about the legal rules around sending communication to your patients and families, or about any other legal matter, you should consult your practice’s attorney. The ideas below are not intended as legal advice.

Understand Consent to Contact and the Healthcare Exception

PCC includes features to send texts (SMS), emails, patient portal messages, and automated calls to patients and families. However, if your practice plans to send messages to several thousand families, you may be worried that you will break a regulation.

Patients and families shared their contact information with you because you are their pediatric practice. You have been given implicit consent to contact them about healthcare matters. There are many laws and regulations that govern communication, and this implicit consent for healthcare communication is often an allowed exception.

Your practice can also collect explicit, written consent for contact with patients and families, which provides an additional layer of certainty and sets communication expectations between the practice and the family. (See below.)

Your practice should discuss these issues with your lawyer. PCC does not provide legal advice.

Follow Best Practices When You Send Messages to Patients and Families

PCC recommends you follow common best practices for communication. Your patients and families may feel spammed, even if your communication is not unsolicited. When it comes to building long-term relationships with your patients and families, feelings can matter more than the rules.

Here are some best practices, based on federal guidelines, to consider as you develop your practice’s plan for outgoing communication:

  • Use Contact Information Provided To You, Use It For Healthcare Reasons: You should only send communications to patients and families who gave you their contact information for healthcare purposes. (Do not import a phone book or a local school directory!) PCC’s communication features are built around contacting your patients and their families and should not be used for other mass communication such as telemarketing or advertising.

  • Narrow Your List of Recipients: Your practice has thousands of patients in your database. How many of them need to receive your message? Maybe only half of them still come to your practice, and you may want to exclude any dismissed families, for example. Even when you are contacting all patients who are behind on an immunization, you should evaluate who is included in that list. Use PCC EHR’s reporting tools to exclude by account and patient flags and use other criteria to limit the number of outgoing messages you are sending.

  • Be Concise: You should limit the length of your outgoing messages. PCC’s text (SMS) tools automatically support this by limiting the total number of characters to 160.

  • Identify Yourself: When your practice crafts your outgoing messages to patients and families, it is a best practice to identify who you are. Some pediatric practices send messages that indicate they are from the patient’s primary care physician, providing an additional personal touch. You can use PCC’s reporting tools to create lists of patients and send out batches based on PCP or other criteria.

  • Do Not Include PHI: Depending on the format of your communication, you might decide to include patient and appointment information in your message. As a general precaution, you should avoid including private health information in your messages as it is easy for a phone to be picked up by someone other than the intended recipient.

  • Limit the Frequency of Your Messages: It is a best practice to send no more than one message a day or three per week.

  • Provide Return Contact Information: Consider adding your return contact information or details on how to reply to your outgoing messages. You could add a note to the footer or end of all messages, such as “Call BF Pediatrics at 555-1082”, or even just “CB: 555-1082” to indicate the Call Back number.

  • Indicate If a Message Can’t Be Replied To: When you send automated messages, replies go to a “no-reply” email address or phone number. Consider indicating that in your message. In PCC EHR, you can review any replies that families sent you, but if you include a “do not reply to this message”, it can help avoid confusion and missed messages.

  • Indicate How to Opt-Out or Unsubscribe: PCC’s communication tools automatically include an unsubscribe link on emails and the ability to receive “stop” or “unsubscribe” text (SMS) responses. You can notify your families about these methods or include a note about them in your message.

Get Explicit Written Permission to Call, Text, and Email Your Patients and Families

Your front desk is already in the habit of regularly updating demographic and contact information provided by families, which constitutes an implicit permission to contact them about healthcare matters. PCC recommends that you also collect an explicit “consent to contact” when a family joins your practice or at a family’s annual paperwork update.

Have a Written Policy for Patients and Families

Click here for a sample of a written communication agreement. You could add this or other text to your existing check-in process, demographic update forms, or office policy forms. You can also use it as a stand-alone consent form.

You might also add a “Preferred Contact Method” note to this agreement, or to your standard new patient intake forms.

Make sure you have a plan for updating patient and family consent to contact at the front desk or when sharing other forms.

Keep Track of Who Has (and Has Not) Given Consent to Contact

When you receive written permission, track it. For example, you can scan the consent form into the patient’s chart and add a “contact consent” or “opt-in” flag to their account.

Conversely, if someone refuses this permission or gives consent but later revokes it, this should be tracked and honored as well. Flags can be used to manage this. For help using flags in PCC’s Notification Center, read this article.

Can a Patient or Family Opt Out Without Contacting You?: If you are using PCC’s Broadcast Messaging or notify features, patients and families have built-in methods for opting out. (See Broadcast Messaging or Patient Notification Center: Other Considerations and Options). However, it is also great to keep track on the patient’s record using a flag so you can exclude them with criteria when you use PCC’s various communication and reporting tools.

Track and Use Each Patient’s Preferred Contact Method

Use the Confidential Communication Preference fields on the patient record to indicate how your patients and families wish to be contacted.

Your office can collect a patient’s preferred phone, e-mail, or text message contact preference during Patient Check-In or at any time in the Demographics section of the patient’s chart. If your practice still uses the Practice Management text-based PCC tools, you can find these fields in checkin or in other tools that edit patient demographics.

PCC’s communication tools use the Confidential Communication Preference in various ways: phone numbers will appear as an option for a direct text message, for example, and this contact method will be preferred for automated reminder notifications.

Send a Message to PCC, Too!

Contact PCC Support with any questions or for help getting started with a patient recall, broadcast messaging, sending single text messages directly to a family in PCC EHR, or other need.

PCC’s support teams are experienced at crafting custom recall reports. They can also configure which users at your practice have access to different communication tools.

PCC’s Contract With You: PCC’s user agreement with your practice includes addendum about communications. These details have been updated in 2020. If you have any questions, please get in touch with PCC Sales.

Washington State C-CDA Submission for Apple Care Patients

/in /by

Washington State’s Health Care Authority (HCA) requires providers to submit C-CDAs for patients who are enrolled with Apple Health Managed Care. C-CDAs need to be sent to the Washington Link4Health Clinical Data Repository (CDR) after each visit.

PCC EHR is a Meaningful Use certified EHR using the 2014-edition standards. Therefore, you can create a Summary of Care Record in PCC EHR and send it via direct secure messaging (DSM) in a C-CDA format. The following workflow was developed by one of PCC’s Washington state clients to send C-CDA files to the Link4Health CDR.

First, generate a list of patients using the Recaller program. Next, create and send a Summary of Care via DSM for each patient on the list.

First: Use Recaller to Generate a List of Patients

Every day, someone from your practice should run the Recaller program in Partner to get a list of all patients seen that day who are enrolled with Washington Apple Care (Medicaid).

Note: Make sure that all visits for the selected time frame have posted before you run the Recaller report. Only posted visits will be included in the list.

Open the Recaller Program

The Patient Recaller program is found in the Practice Management screen under Patient/Account Reports.

For more detailed instructions on accessing Recaller, read the Recaller Quickstart.

Add Insurance and Visit Criteria

Choose criteria that will give you a list of all Apple Care clients who were seen within the time frame for which you are sending C-CDAs. Possible selections are “Include by Insurance Plan” and either “Date of Last Visit” or “Procedure (All Providers)”.

Note: PCC recommends that you work with your Client Advocate to build the right Recaller search for your practice.


For more information on all Recaller criteria and the tools for entering criteria details, read the Recaller Criteria Reference.

Optional: Save Your Recaller Search Criteria for Later Use

You can save and restore your criteria settings for a report so you will not have to rebuild them whenever you run the Apple Care recall. Press F4 – Save Criteria from the criteria screen, enter a name, and press F1.

For a complete guide to re-using Recaller report sets, read Saving and Restoring Recaller Settings.

Select Output Type

Press F2 – Output and select “Patient Standard List” for a simple contact list.

Process the List

Press F1 – Process to generate the list.

For a complete guide to Recaller output, read the Recaller Output Reference.

Second: Create and Send a Summary of Care for Each Patient

For each patient on the list, you can generate a Summary of Care Record Report and submit it directly to Washington Link4Health CDR with Direct Secure Messaging.

Generate the Summary of Care Record Report

Use the Reports menu in PCC EHR to create a Summary of Care Record.

Open a Patient’s Chart

Before you can create a Summary of Care, you must first have the patient’s chart open in PCC EHR.

Generate the Summary of Care

You can save or export a Summary of Care as a C-CDA file, which is the format required by Washington HCA.

Select “Summary of Care Record” from the Reports menu.


Indicate That the Record is Not a Referral or Transition

Select “Not related to a transition of care” from the drop-down menu.

Transmit a C-CDA Transition of Care Document Using Direct Secure Messaging

If your practice uses Direct Secure Messaging, and you have a Direct Address configured for your user account, you can transmit a Summary of Care Record directly to another Direct Secure Messaging user.

You will need to contact the Washington Link4Health CDR to get the address they want you to use.

Select “Send via Direct Secure Message” and fill out the fields for the message.

Note: If your practice is not currently using Direct Secure Messaging, you will not see this radio button option. Contact your Client Advocate to get set up with DSM.

Bill for Phone Encounters and Portal Messages

/in , , , /by

Your practice can bill for phone calls and portal messages.

Read the procedure below to learn how to chart and bill for a phone encounter (or portal message thread). Next, you can review the other sections below to learn about configuration and tips for turning phone calls and portal messages into billable telemedicine encounters.

Watch a Video: You can watch an example of how a practice charts and bills for a phone call (or portal message): Bill for Phone Encounters and Portal Messages.

Schedule a Telemedicine Encounter Instead: The article below talks about documenting a phone note or portal thread so you can bill for it. However, PCC recommends that you schedule, chart, and bill a telemedicine appointment instead.

Chart a Phone Note and Then Bill For It

Read the procedure below to learn how your practice can treat every call as though it may be billable, and then how to bill for it.

Follow This Procedure for a Portal Message As Well: The procedure below shows billing for a phone call. Portal Messages follow the same workflow and use the same set of tools.

Create a Phone Note

When your practice takes a call or receives a message, you record information on a new phone note.

You can click “Add Phone Note” from the PCC EHR search results or from inside a patient’s chart. A triage nurse or front desk might take the initial call, create the phone note, and then assign it to a clinician to make a followup call.

Billable Phone Encounters Must Be Initiated by the Patient or Parent: If your practice makes the initial call to schedule or begin a phone encounter, that phone or portal message encounter can not typically be billed.

Document the Phone Encounter on the Phone Note

Next, a clinician at your practice documents the phone encounter with enough detail to cover telemedicine requirements.

For example, use the Subject field to reflect the main topic of the encounter. Include enough clinical information in the phone note to make a diagnosis. Make note of all questions asked during the call, and all clinical information given. Include any reassurances offered. Include all topics covered during the conversation.

Record the Duration of the Call

Record the duration of the call, in minutes, on the phone note.

By entering the exact duration, you chart an important element of the encounter. The duration is used to support the encounter’s billing code(s).

How Do I Code the Duration of a Phone Call?: For help understanding how duration affects the coding level for a phone encounter, check out PCC’s Telemedicine Billing Code Time Table

Select Diagnoses

Chart one or more diagnoses on the phone note. Optionally, you can simultaneously add a diagnosis to the patient’s chart-wide Problem List.

When you select a diagnosis description, PCC EHR automatically adds an appropriate ICD-10 code to the phone note’s Electronic Encounter Form.

Optional: Order Labs, Referrals, Procedures, and Other Orders

During the course of the call (or later when charting), you can create orders. Your practice can add orders components directly to the phone note protocol and make common orders available from a single click.

Can I Bill This Order From a Phone Encounter?: Orders that you create during a phone or portal message are not always billable. When you click “Order”, PCC EHR can automatically add appropriate diagnoses and procedures to your electronic encounter form, and your biller will need to be aware of limitations and make changes when they post charges.

Click “Bill” and Select a Visit Code

Next, click “Bill” to review and select codes on the Electronic Encounter Form.


The Electronic Encounter Form displays all diagnoses and procedure codes from items the clinician selected on the phone note. They will typically select a visit code manually.

Your practice can configure what encounter codes appear on the Bill window. For example, for a telemedicine visit you might select a -95 code for a live audio and video E&M visit. For a phone-only visit, you might use time based codes 99441-99443. PCC does not recommend specific codes, you should check your CPT manual and consult with your payors for billing requirements.

Update Units and Diagnosis Linking and Make the Visit Ready for Billing

After you review and add codes, you can review units and which diagnosis is linked to each procedure. Next, make the visit ready for billing.

Sign the Encounter

Complete your notes and click “Sign” to sign the phone note, just as you would for other encounters.


PCC EHR supports cosigning providers if needed.

Monitor the Messaging Queue for Billable Messages

A biller at your practice can check the Messaging queue to find phone and portal messages that may be billable.

Sort the Messaging queue and use filters to limit the list to appropriate items for the biller to review.

For example, a biller can use the Billing Status filter to limit the list of messages to phone notes and portal messages that are “Ready to Post”, “Posted” and that may have “New Items” to post.

The 'Due' Filter Can Hide Messages: Practices can use due dates on tasks to hide a message until it becomes due–for example, to schedule a call back or a followup about test results. If you use the “Due” filter on the Messaging queue, be aware you could hide message encounters that are ready to bill today.

Click “Ready to Post” to Open a Message Encounter

When you are ready to review an encounter and post charges, click “Ready To Post”.

Assess Whether an Encounter is Related to Another Appointment

Use the patient’s Visit History, Encounter Details, and other chart sections to find out if the encounter is billable.

For example, a phone call might be a followup for a previous E&M visit within 7 days prior, or the call may have resulted in a visit the following day. Whether or not you can bill for an encounter depends upon specific rules for each visit code.

If the patient has an in-office E&M (for example) near the time of the call, you can open the chart note and check the reason. If the visit reason was not related to the phone call, then both that visit and the phone call may be billable.

For precise guidance on the restrictions for each billing code, check your CPT manual. In general, if a phone call is within 7 days of an E&M visit for a related reason, you may not bill the call and should instead incorporate the work performed into the claim for the in-office E&M visit.

Update the Billing Place of Service

If your payer requires a specific telemedicine place of service, you can change it along with other details in the Post Charges protocol.

Update Diagnoses, Procedures, Claim Information, and Payments

Next, the biller can make any required adjustments to diagnoses, procedures, claim information, or payments.

Billing for telemedicine is a rapidly evolving issue. PCC hosts web labs and a COVID-19 Coding Guide which we update regularly.

Click “Save + Post” to Queue Up a Claim

Finally, the biller clicks “Save + Post” to post the charges and queue up a claim.

Later, the biller can come back to Post Charges if they need to add additional items.

Optional: Post Charges for a Phone Note or Portal Message in Practice Management Instead

If your billers prefer the older Post Charges (checkout, chuck) charge posting tool, they can use it instead. While the Practice Management interface does not include all functionality found in PCC EHR, some billers prefer it.

A PCC EHR Phone Note or Portal Message does not send encounter form information to Partner. Instead, the biller can enter diagnoses and procedures.

Open the Practice Management Checkout Program

Run checkout from the Daily Operations window in Practice Management.

Find the Correct Patient and Create a New Encounter

Press F2 – Find Patient to pull up the record of the patient whose telemedicine encounter you are billing. From the patient’s encounter list, press F4 – Create Encounter.

Enter Visit Date, Visit Reason, Physician, and Charges

Within the new encounter, change the Visit Date to reflect the actual date the phone call took place. Select the Visit Reason, Physician, Diagnosis and Procedure Name for the service.

As you enter encounter charges, you can use other functions in checkout to adjust copay, claim information, units, and more.

Post Charges and Queue Up a Claim

Press F1 – Next Step to save your charge and go to the next screen. When you complete your practice’s checkout workflow, you can press F1 – Post and Print to save encounter details and queue up an insurance claim.

Configure PCC EHR for Phone Note Billing

In order to get paid for telemedicine services provided over the phone, you may need to adjust how you chart phone notes. Review the items below to learn more.

Revise the Phone Note Protocol

If you are not already tracking call duration within your phone notes, you can add it to your existing Phone Note Protocol. You can also add the Diagonses component, orders components, and any other component your practice would use for a phone encounter.

Open the Component Builder

Navigate to the Protocol Configuration tool and select the Component Builder.


Create a Duration Component

Add a new custom entry field for “Duration of Call (exact minutes)” to your Component Builder.



Duration vs Start/Stop: If you prefer, create two fields to track the Start Time and Stop Time of the call, rather than one Duration field. You just need a way to track the total minutes spent on the call.

Edit the Phone Note Protocol

Return to the Protocol Configuration and open the Protocol Builder to edit your existing Phone Note Protocol.


Add Components to the Phone Note Protocol

Review the components on your practice’s Phone Note and/or Portal Message protocol. Consider adding your new duration component, the Diagnoses component, and any other component that will help you chart on the phone note or portal message.


Create a Telemedicine Procedure Group and Add Telemedicine Procedures

To learn how to set up procedures, codes, and prices on your PCC system, read Configure PCC EHR for Telemedicine Encounters.

For more help in setting up new procedures, contact PCC Support.

Will Payers Pay for Phone Calls and Portal Message Encounters?

When you care for patients and families over the phone or a portal message, you provide a valuable service. PCC recommends that you treat every phone note as though it could be a billable service, unless it is for scheduling or clearly related to another appointment.

PCC has heard from pediatric practices that the smart move is to submit claims for telephone services to all of your insurance carriers–even if you know they won’t pay. The industry is changing, and the COVID-19 pandemic changed the landscape for telemedicine payment.

As always, check with your insurance providers to review their policies and requirements.

Review and Update Medication History

/in /by

There are several ways to see what medications your patient is taking, has taken, and how they were prescribed.

Review Basic Medication History in PCC EHR

Use the Medication History component in PCC EHR to review what medications your patient takes.

By default, the Medication History component appears on the Medical Summary, but your practice may also add it to visit notes, phone notes, and portal messages.

The Medication History component shows all of the patient’s prescribed and reported medications. You can filter the list to display only active medications, if you prefer.

Each medication displays with pertinent details, including the start and stop date. At the top of the component, you can see when the patient’s medication history was last modified. Beneath the component, you can see when the patient’s medication history was last marked as reviewed.

You can mark the Medication History as reviewed if you are viewing the component within your patient’s visit note, phone note, or portal message.

Mark Medications and eRx Allergies as Reviewed in PCC EHR

You can mark a patient’s Medication History and eRx Allergies as reviewed while charting on a visit note, phone note, or portal message in PCC EHR, avoiding the need to open PCC eRx just for this purpose.

The date and attribution for the most recent review appear below each component.

The last reviewed date on the chart note only updates when you mark the Medication History and eRx Allergies components as reviewed within PCC EHR. Marking them as reviewed within PCC eRx does not update the chart note.

If changes are made to the patient’s medications or allergies after you review them, PCC EHR will indicate that there have been changes, prompting a new review.

The final visit note and the visit history will show eRx Allergies and Medication History items that were reviewed in the context of the chart note. Allergies and medications that have not been marked as reviewed from within the chart note will not appear in the visit history.

You can see all historical medications and eRx allergies, regardless of their associated visit, in the Medical Summary. The last reviewed date in the Medical Summary reflects the latest review, whether it occurred in PCC eRx or in the patient’s chart note.

See Additional Details and Update a Patient’s Medications

If you need to see additional details, update the patient’s medication history, or re-prescribe a medication that appears in the list, open PCC eRx.

The Medication History component in PCC eRx displays the patient’s medications in detail, whether prescribed or entered manually based on self-reporting.

As soon as you prescribe something, it appears on the history, and is mirrored in the Medication History component in PCC EHR.

Filters and Groups: By default, the history shows only active medications. Click the “Active & Inactive” filter button to see both active and inactive medications.

Special Filters for Patients On Lots of Medications: If a patient chronically takes multiple medications, you can group them by indication, class, and generic name for easier review and navigation.

Edit a Historical Medication

Use the red edit pencil icon to edit an entry in your patient’s Medication History.

You might want to edit an entry if you verbally instructed a patient to change their dose or learned from a specialist that one of the medications they prescribed has changed in some way.

Add a Historical Medication

If your patient or one of their specialists reports a medication, homeopathic cure, or other remedy that your practice did not prescribe, you can manually add it to their Medication History. Click the “Add Hx Med” button, then enter the details.


You can search for the medication or select a favorite. After you enter the medication details, indicate the source of the information and save.

Record that You Provided a Sample of a Medication: Use this same “Add Hx Med” button to record that you provided a patient with a sample medication. You might also record that you provided a sample in the Plan section of a chart note, or record it with an order on the chart note. For help setting up components or creating custom orders, contact your PCC Client Advocate.

See Active Prescriptions

An “Active Rx” label tells you when a medication in the patient’s history is linked to an active prescription.

Hover over the label to see details about the prescription such as the quantity, number of refills, start date, stop date, and pharmacy.

If you discontinue a medication that is linked to an active prescription, PCC eRx may send an electronic cancellation message to the pharmacy. You can set your electronic cancellation message preference in the Medication History section of the My Settings page.

Mark Medication History as Reviewed

You can click “Mark as reviewed” to indicate you have reviewed the patient’s medications, and that status will be updated in the patient’s chart in PCC EHR.


Discontinue a Single Medication

To discontinue a single medication and remove it from the patient’s active medication list, click the trash can icon beside it, then enter your reason for removing it.


The entry moves to the patient’s inactive medication list with today’s date as the stop date.

You can also discontinue a single medication by clicking the edit pencil icon beside it, then clicking the “Discontinue” button.


You might want to do this if you need to edit the medication details before discontinuing it.

Any medication with an explicit stop date automatically falls off the patient’s active medication list after that date passes. To learn more about stop dates in PCC eRx, read Days Supply, Auto-Calculation, Stop Date, and Duration.

Discontinue Medications in Bulk

To discontinue multiple entries in the patient’s medication history, click the “Clean Up Med Hx” button, then select whichever entries you want to remove from the active medication list.


Click the “Discontinue Medications” button, then enter your reason for removing them.


The entries move the patient’s inactive medication list with today as the stop date. To learn more about stop dates, read Days Supply, Auto-Calculation, Stop Date, and Duration.

Add an Internal Comment

You can add a comment to the Medication History, which may be useful for notes about parental medication allergies and other medication-related information that cannot be recorded using the “Add Hx Med” button.



Renew Historical Medications

Click the “Renew Prescription” icon to renew a historical medication. Or, click the “Create New Prescription” icon to make a new prescription from a historical medication.


When you renew a historical medication, the resulting prescription matches what you prescribed last time, including any customizations you might have made to the days supply or total dispense quantity. By contrast, when you create a new prescription from a historical medication, the days supply and dispense quantity are recalculated based on the dosing instructions specified in the previous prescription.

Your RapidRx on Renew setting on the My Settings page in PCC eRx determines which workflow you experience when you renew a prescription.

If you have the “Display RapidRx when renewing a medication” checkbox selected, renewed prescriptions immediately open to a screen where you can edit and process them.


If you do not have the “Display RapidRx when renewing a medication” checkbox selected in your settings, renewed prescriptions pend in the Review & Sign section of the eRx encounter associated with the patient’s visit note, phone note, or portal message.


You can use the red edit pencil to edit pending renewals, then finish processing them by selecting all that are ready and clicking the “Finalize Prescriptions” button.

The ability to renew medications is only available to users with a PCC eRx role of Clinical Staff, Provider Agent, Mid-Level Provider, or Provider.

To learn more about how to renew a medication or prescription, read Renew Prescriptions.

Review Detailed Prescription History for Each Medication

Click the blue plus (+) icon to see a complete list of prescriptions for that medication and others of the same generic type.


Click the gray disclosure triangle beside any prescription in the details view to see complete patient, prescriber, pharmacy, and prescribed medication details, as well as the actual message that was sent to the pharmacy and its delivery status.


Review Medication Care Guidance

Click the “i” icon to view generic care guidance for the medication in question, including common indications, side effects, counseling messages, and black box warnings.


Work in Prescription History

The Prescription History component in PCC eRx shows a reverse chronological record of all prescriptions ordered by your practice for a given patient.

For each prescription, you can see the start and stop dates, medication, instructions, quantity and refills, prescriber or agent, and other details, including the destination pharmacy.

You can use the Prescription History to review, renew, or print a copy of a past prescription.

Prescription History vs Medication History: Prescription and Medication History offer distinct yet complementary views of a patient’s pharmacological treatment history. Prescription History is a reverse chronological list of all prescriptions ordered by your practice for a patient. Medication History displays a list of the patient’s active medications and may include items your practice didn’t prescribe, such as specialist medications or self-reported homeopathic remedies. Each one displays medication and prescription details and offers the possibility to renew medications, but you might find one to be better suited to your workflows than the other.

Import a Record of Prescriptions Filled by Retail Pharmacies

Use the Retail Rx History component in PCC eRx to search the Surescripts network for records of prescriptions filled for your patient by retail pharmacies. Surescripts is a vendor that facilitates e-prescription information exchange.

First, affirm that you have patient or guardian consent. Then click “Query Retail Rx History”.


Consent Checked By Default: The “Consent” box for retail prescription history is checked by default in your PCC system. You can uncheck it if the patient or guardian does not consent to you querying for retail prescription history.

PCC eRx retrieves the past two years of retail prescription history available from insurance companies and partner pharmaceutical systems. You can review instructions, refills, and other notes on file with the pharmacy. Note that a history probably does not include over-the-counter medications.

To see more information, click the clinician or refill icons.


Click “Copy” next to any historical prescription to copy it into the patient’s Medication History. PCC eRx will prompt you to select the matching medication from your system’s medication library, and then allow you to adjust information about the medication record before you save it to the patient’s chart.



After you save the medication, you can review it and make changes in the Medication History component.

Consent to Query: PCC recommends you add permission to query retail prescription history to your standard patient policy forms. Otherwise, you could ask the question once during a visit.

Query Constraints: A Retail Rx History query result remains visible in the PCC eRx section of the patient chart for 72 hours. You cannot re-query the patient’s retail prescription history within that time period. After the 72-hour period, you can re-query the patient’s retail prescription history.

Patient Match Criteria: Surescripts uses the patient’s first name, middle name or initial, last name, name suffix, date of birth, sex, full address including ZIP code, and phone number to find prescriptions that were filled at participating retail pharmacies within the last two years. The more consistent your practice is in filling out these patient details, the better chance you have of consistently getting high quality responses to your retail prescription queries.

Find Patients and Accounts

/in , , /by

Use the search field in the upper-left corner of PCC EHR to quickly find any patient.

To find a family account, use the account finder in such tools as Payments, or whenever you add or reassign billing and custodial accounts to a patient.

Read below to learn handy tips and tricks for finding both patient and account records in PCC EHR.

Search for a Patient

You can always find a patient with the search tool in the upper-left corner of PCC EHR. You can use the patient finder while you are scheduling, viewing other queues, or reviewing a different chart.


The patient finder is designed to help you find patients quickly and easily. Simply type all or a part a patient’s name and the finder will search all first and last names and show you the results.

After finding a patient, you can open their chart, create a phone note, or perform other actions.

Search by Birth Date or Phone Number

You can also search for a patient by their birth date or phone number. PCC EHR is smart enough to know the difference: if you enter a number that can be read as a date, PCC EHR will show you all patients born on that date. If you are looking for a patient born on April 5, 2008, you can type any of the following:

  • 040508
  • 04/05/08
  • 4508
  • 4/5/08
  • 04052008
  • 04/05/2008
  • 452008
  • 4/5/2008

You can replace the digits “4” or “04” in any of the above number sequences and get the same result. Also, you can use or omit spaces between the month, day, and year. PCC EHR lets you enter dates in the way that is easiest for you when you are searching.

Any number that cannot be understood as a date will return a phone number search. If you were searching for PCC’s main office by phone number, you could enter:

  • 800-722-7708
  • 8007227708
  • 800 722 7708
  • (800) 722-7708

. . . or any variation thereof. PCC EHR is interested in the numbers, not the spaces, dashes, or parentheses, so again you can choose the method that works best for you.

Search by Other Patient Information

You can use some special prefixes to search for patients in other ways. For example, you can search for patients by their patient chart number using any of the following:

  • pcc[number]
  • #[number]
  • pcc#[number]
  • pt[number]
  • pt#[number]
  • patient[number]
  • patient#[number]

You can also search based on your practice’s customizable patient fields.

Enter the patient field search key word, a colon, and the search text to search by a custom patient field.


Search for an Account

PCC EHR’s main search box is patient-based, and is used to open patient charts, create new phone notes, and similar.

When you open an account-based tool (like the Payments tool), or are when you add an account to a patient’s record, you will use the Account Finder.

The Account Finder works in the same way as the Patient Finder. The search box will return account names or phone numbers. It will not, however, search for birth dates.

Instead of finding patient numbers, the Account Finder can look for account numbers, using these prefixes:

  • acct[number]
  • #[number]
  • acct#[number]
  • account[number]
  • account#[number]

You can also search on your practice’s custom Account Information fields, using customizable search terms.

Configure Patient Searches

You can search for patient charts using any of your practice’s four custom patient fields. You must first turn on and configure that feature. For example, if you wish to search by the Chart # field, you must activate that field for search in PCC EHR. Follow the procedure below to activate patient field searching and configure your search key words.

Open Practice Preferences

First, click on the Tools menu and select Practice Preferences.

Enter Search Words or Leave Blank

Next, enter a short search term for each field. When you enter a Search Key word, you activate the field and make it searchable in PCC EHR.

Turn Field Searching Off: If you do not wish to be able to search by one or more of the patient fields, leave the Search Key field blank for that field.

Save Your Changes

Click “Save” to save your changes.

Test Your Changes

You can test searching right away, by entering your Search Key, a colon, and some search text in the PCC EHR Find box.


Configure Account Searches

You can search for billing and custodial accounts using any of your practice’s six custom Account Information fields. You must first turn on and configure that feature. For example, if you wish to search by an alternate last name field, you must activate that field for search in PCC EHR. Follow the procedure below to activate account field searching and configure your search key words.

Open Practice Preferences

First, click on the Tools menu and select Practice Preferences.

Enter Search Term or Leave Blank

Next, enter a short search term for each field. When you enter a Search Key word, you activate the field and make it searchable in PCC EHR.

Turn Field Searching Off: If you do not wish to be able to search by one or more of the patient fields, leave the Search Key field blank for that field.

Save Your Changes

Click “Save” to save your changes.

Use the New Search Key

The next time you log into PCC EHR, you can search on the Alt Last Name field by entering the Search Key, a colon, and some search text in the Account Finder.


Add pocketPCC to Your Home Screen

/in /by

Follow the instructions in this article to add a pocketPCC app-style icon to your mobile device.

PocketPCC is a web-based, mobile version of PCC EHR. You can access pocketPCC from any web browser, giving you access to patient data, messaging, and charting tools from anywhere in the world. By saving a link to pocketPCC on your phone’s home screen, the mobile version of PCC EHR will always be just one touch away. For details on configuring pocketPCC, visit Getting Started With pocketPCC.

Note: The instructions on this page can be used to add any web link to a mobile device’s home screen. You can use these steps to help your patients add PCC’s Patient Portal to their phones.

Add pocketPCC to Your Apple iOS Home Screen

Open Your Web Browser

First, open your browser. pocketPCC works in any browser; for this example, we’ll use Safari, the default browser for the iPhone.

Enter the url for pocketPCC

Enter your practice’s url for pocketPCC. Contact your office’s system administrator or PCC Support if you do not know your address. Typically, your pocketPCC login address will be your practice’s acronym (such as “ACRO”) followed by pocketpcc, and it will always use the https secure protocol: “https://ACRO.pcc.com/pocketpcc”.


Add the Link to pocketPCC to Your Home Screen

Touch the Action icon at the bottom of your screen (you may have to scroll down to make the Safari system icons appear), and then select “Add to Home Screen.” Name the link anything you want (it will default to “pocketPCC”) and click “Add”.




Add pocketPCC to Your Android Home Screen

Open Your Web Browser

First, open your browser. pocketPCC works in any browser; for this example, we’ll use Chrome, the default browser for Android devices.

Enter the url for pocketPCC

Enter your practice’s url for pocketPCC. Contact your office’s system administrator or PCC Support if you do not know your address. Typically, your pocketPCC login address will be your practice’s acronym (such as “ACRO”) followed by pocketpcc, and it will always use the https secure protocol: “https://ACRO.pcc.com/pocketpcc”.


Add the Link to pocketPCC to Your Home Screen

Touch the action overflow icon in the top corner of your screen, and then select “Add to Home Screen.” Name the link anything you want (it will default to “pocketPCC”) and click “Add”.




Bright Futures in PCC

/in /by

Bright Futures is a national health promotion and prevention initiative led by the American Academy of Pediatrics. (brightfutures.aap.org)

PCC provides Bright Futures chart note protocols, periodicity schedules, handouts, and more to all PCC practices. For example, your default installation of PCC EHR includes sample Bright Futures visit chart note templates that your practice can customize or adjust to your visit workflow.

Read below to find out more about Bright Futures and see where you can use Bright Futures guidelines in PCC’s software and services.

What is Bright Futures, Anyway?

Bright Futures is a set of guidelines and recommendations for pediatric well visits. It includes “theory-based and evidence-driven guidance for all preventive care screenings and well-child visits.” (brightfutures.aap.org)

Bright Futures provides that guidance in the form of a periodicity schedule, educational materials, and other content that can be used to craft chart notes and pediatric practice workflows.

To learn more, visit the AAP’s Bright Futures website.

Bright Futures Visit Protocols

PCC EHR includes a complete set of chart note protocols based on Bright Futures recommendations. You can use these protocols to guide your visit workflow and chart visits. You can customize them and add and remove components to make them work for your practice.

If you are a new PCC client, you’ll see the latest Bright Futures-based chart note protocols in the Protocol Configuration tool.

If you joined PCC before 2018’s rollout of the new Bright Future’s charting recommendations, you may see protocols based on Bright Futures 3rd edition. You can contact PCC Support for help importing and configuring the latest protocols.

Are Bright Futures Protocols Too Long and Detailed to Use?

Some clinicians dislike the Bright Futures recommendations because they include too many sections and could lead to a well visit that takes too long to complete.

The developers of Bright Futures agree. Their recommendation: Use what the patient needs, and skip the rest.

Not every visit will require every screening or issue included on a Bright Futures well visit chart note template. A 15-second question about depression, for example, may or may not lead to a 15-minute depression screening. However, a big protocol is a powerful protocol. You can use what the patient needs, and skip the rest.

Bright Futures Handouts in PCC EHR’s Patient Education Tool

Bright Futures handouts, questionnaires, and other materials published by the AAP are available inside PCC EHR and also available by website login to all PCC Customers.

When you are working with a patient, you can open the Patient Education tool, pick a diagnosis, and the AAP portal window will display the appropriate handouts.

For more information, read: Patient Education and Handouts

Bright Futures Periodicity Schedule

The Bright Futures guidelines include recommendations for how often patients should be seen at each stage of development and what screenings and tests should be considered during each well visit. PCC provides recommendations and software tools to help you implement this schedule.

  • Review the AAP's Periodicity Schedule: You can review the AAP’s Bright Futures recommendations for each well visit here: The AAP Bright Futures Periodicity Schedule. It’s a great summary of the AAPs recommendations for preventative pediatric health care.

  • AAP's Bright Futures Periodicity Schedule is Included in PCC EHR: PCC’s Bright Futures chart note protocols include all screenings and other recommendations for each well visit.

  • How Do I Code and Bill for Procedures on the Bright Futures Periodicity Schedule?: PCC’s certified coder, Jan Blanchard, created a version of the periodicity schedule that displays billable codes for screenings and other procedures performed at each well visit. You can read it here: Coding for Bright Futures Periodicity Schedule

How can you best configure PCC EHR to implement this periodicity schedule for your practice? By setting up visit reasons for your schedule, using Bright Futures protocols or adding appropriate screenings to your visit protocols, and implementing workflow methods at your practice. Contact PCC Support for help.

Bright Futures 4th Edition

In 2017-2018, the AAP updated Bright Futures materials and recommendations to the 4th edition. Here are a few highlights of 4th edition changes:

  • Chart Note Templates: Bright Futures 4th Edition updated the AAP’s recommendations for well visits. PCC reviewed these updates and created new Bright Futures 4th Edition protocols. You can work with PCC Support and follow these instructions to install them on your system.

  • Questions and Guidelines: Bright Futures 4th Edition places an increased focus on the social determinants of health.

  • Periodicity Schedule: The AAP’s recommended visit periodicity schedule shifted slightly with Bright Futures 4th Edition. You can see the latest, up-to-date schedule here: AAP Bright Futures Periodicity Schedule Wonder what changes were made for Bright Futures 4th edition? Read the AAP’s notes about the changes.

  • Handouts: Bright Futures handouts, which are created for well visits and related issues for each age and sex, were also updated in Bright Futures 4th Edition. In PCC, you can access these materials with the Patient Education tool. You can print the materials, save them to a patient’s chart, or send them to patients and families with PCC’s Patient Portal.

For more information, visit Bright Futures.

Best Practices Workflow for Outbound Lab Orders

/in /by

When a patient needs tests that your in-house lab cannot perform, it’s time to send out to an external facility.

The procedures outlined in this article will help your team stay organized as you requisition external lab tests, process results, and plan next steps.

The procedures are grouped by user role; your practice may find that some of the steps should be done by different individuals, which is fine. The important thing is that the steps are followed in a certain order, not who performs each task.

Orders Overview: For an overview of where to find and how to use orders in PCC EHR, watch this video on order workflow.

Lab Configuration: If you need help setting up lab orders, please read the Lab Configuration article, and get in touch with PCC Support.

The Provider Orders a Lab and Assigns the Task to “Nurse”

The provider begins by ordering a lab while charting a patient’s visit. The lab order has a task built into it, which the provider assigns to a generic, role-based user account such as “Nurse”.

Why Assign Tasks to Generic, Role-Based User Accounts?: When you assign tasks to a generic user such as “Nurse”, it makes it easier for staff members who share that role to work on the assignments as a group in the Visit Tasks queue. As long as someone with that role is working each day, you know your tasks will promptly be seen and attended to.

Order a Lab

Click “Order” to create the lab order.

Edit the Order

Click the “Edit” button beside the order.

Optionally fill out information tracked by your practice, such as the specimen collection date and source.

The order will eventually need a lab facility. The provider can add it out now or the person who generates the lab requisition can fill it out later.

In This Example: The provider doesn’t know which lab facility the patient’s insurance prefers so she leaves it blank. A member of the nursing staff will do the research and document a facility when it’s time to generate the requisition and call the lab for a pickup.

Add a Task or Edit the Built-In Task

Click “Add Task” or edit the task built into the order and select what should happen next.

Common next steps are Collect Specimen and Generate Requisition.

In This Example: The patient has provided a urine sample and the next step is to prepare a requisition that will accompany the sample to the lab.

Assign the Task to “Nurse”

In the To field, select the user who should complete the task.

In This Example: The provider assigns the task to the generic “Nurse” user. Many offices assign tasks to generic users so that staff members can monitor shared lists on the Visit Tasks queue.

Save the Order

Click “Save Order” to save your work.

Once the order has been saved, the Task will appear for the Nurse user on the Visit Tasks queue.

A Nurse Sees the Task and Generates a Requisition

Once the provider saves the new order, a nurse sees the related task appear on the Visit Tasks queue. The nurse carries out the task.

Open the Visit Tasks Queue and Filter it to See Tasks Assigned to “Nurse”

Open the Visit Tasks queue and set the Assigned User filter to “Nurse”.

Find and Open the “Generate Requisition” Task

Find the “Generate Requisition” task for the patient’s lab order and double-click to open it.

Open the Patient’s Chart from the Task Window

Within the task window, click “Open Chart”.

This opens the visit where the order was created.

Generate a Lab Requisition

Locate the Lab section of the patient’s visit.

Verify that a facility has been recorded within each lab order that will appear on the requisition.

Save your changes. Then, scroll to the top of the Lab component and click “Generate Requisition”.

Fill out the orders, diagnoses, and any other details relevant to the requisition.

Click “Generate” to see a preview of the requisition.

Print or Share the Requisition

If the patient or family needs a physical copy of the requisition, or you plan to fax a copy to the lab, you can print it from the document preview window.

You can also send a copy of the requisition in a portal message or share it to the patient’s portal documents.

Save and Close the Requisition

Click “Save” to save the requisition, close it, and return to the lab order in the patient’s chart.

The Nurse Marks the Task Complete and Creates a New Task for “Pending Lab”

The nurse marks the first task as complete, creates a new task, and assigns it to “Pending Lab” while the practice awaits the results.

Open the Lab Order and Mark the First Task Complete

Now that the requisition has been generated, the nurse can mark the task complete.

Find the lab order within the patient’s chart and click “Edit” to open it.

Complete the Task

Click the “Task Completed” box. You can edit the date, time, and user name if you need to. You can also enter a note in the field above, if you wish.

Add a New Task

Click the “Add Task” button to create a new task. This task will serve as a reminder that you are awaiting results from the lab.

Assign the New Task to “Pending Lab”

Select a task type such as “Results Needed” (or something similar) and assign the task to the generic user “Pending Lab”.

Tasks assigned to the generic “Pending Lab” user will remain on the Visit Tasks queue until results come back from the external laboratory.

Save + Exit the Patient’s Chart

Click the “Save” button to record your changes.

Exit the patient’s chart.

Results Arrive From the Lab

Results come in from the lab either as electronic lab (e-lab) results, or as documents. E-labs flow directly onto the E-labs Results queue in the EHR. Document results are scanned, printed, or faxed to PCC EHR. For information on how files are uploaded and stored in PCC EHR, read Documents and Scanning in PCC EHR.

A Nurse Attaches the Results to the Order

A nurse (or whoever monitors the “Pending Lab” user in the Visit Tasks queue) uses the Import Documents screen to attach the lab results to the patient’s chart. They send the results to the provider for signature. Then the nurse then opens the lab order, enters the results, and completes the associated “Results Needed” task.

What About E-labs?: If your order is an e-lab, you will find the results on the E-lab Results queue, rather than using the Import Documents screen. Aside from this, you can attach the results to the patient’s chart, visit, and order in the same way. For more information, read Manage Incoming E-lab Test Results.

Open Import Documents

From any window in PCC EHR, open Import Documents from the File menu or by clicking on the document icon in the bottom left corner of the screen.

Find the Lab Result and Corresponding Patient

Select the lab result document from the list on the left and use the patient finder on the right to search for the patient to whom the results belong. Double-click to select the right patient.

Attach the Results to the Patient’s Chart, Visit, and Order

Once you have selected the patient, categorize the file and attach it to the right visit and lab order.

Send the Results to the Provider for Signature

In the document options, select the provider who needs to sign the results.

Click the “Save” button to finalize the import and send the results to the provider’s signing queue.

Open the Visit Tasks Queue and Filter it to See Tasks Assigned to “Pending Lab”

Open the Visit Tasks queue and set the Assigned User filter to “Pending Lab”.

Find and Open the “Results Needed” Task

Find the “Results Needed” task for the patient’s lab order and double-click to open it.

Enter Lab Results and Mark the Task Complete

Enter the lab test results in the Results field of the lab order. Then, mark the “Results Needed” task complete.

Save the order.

See at a Glance that Results Are In: Once results have been entered into a lab order, the icon next to the lab order name changes to a green check mark. You can see the green check on the Visit Tasks queue and in the visit, phone note, or portal message where the lab was ordered.

The Provider Reviews and Signs the Order

The provider will see the results on their Signing queue as ready to sign. They can review the document, and optionally open the patient’s chart.

The provider can add a signing note as well as a messaging task, if needed.

Open Results From Signing Queue

Double-click on the lab result document from your Signing queue.

Review Results and Optionally Add Note

Look over the document. If applicable, add a note about the results before you sign.

Optional – Add a Task for Follow Up

Add a document task for the nurse (or whoever is appropriate) if additional follow-up is needed.

Sign the Order

Click “Sign”.

The results document automatically closes and returns you to the Signing queue.

Optional – Orders Follow-up Task(s)

The nurse (or whoever was assigned the document task) will see it on their Messaging queue.

The nurse can reference the document and associated notes as they carry out the task that was assigned to them.

Open the Task from the Messaging Queue

Double-click on the task to open it.

The lab results document will open in a new window.

Complete the Task

Click the “Task Completed” box.

You can continue to add additional tasks, as needed.

Save the Document

Click “Save” to complete the document task process.

While it is expected that there may be slight variations based on each practice’s physical workflow, following these guidelines will ensure that your practice does not lose track of outbound lab orders while moving through the process.

Manage Prescription Activity on the Rx Queue

/in /by

The Rx Queue is a one-stop task queue where you can review and process pending prescriptions, sign off on agent prescriptions, respond to pharmacy renewal and change requests, and review and resolve prescription errors. Like other task queues in PCC EHR, you can use filters to tailor the display to your role and workflows.

Video: Watch Manage Prescription Activity on the Rx Queue to learn more.

Overview

The Rx Queue is a hub for prescription activity that may need your attention. A count at the top of the queue tells you how many items there are for you to review based on your filters.

Depending upon your settings and role, you may see up to five sections on the Rx Queue. Each section displays a list of prescriptions that require attention, sorted by patient.

  • Prescription Errors: Electronic prescriptions take a complex and winding path on the journey from your practice to the pharmacy. When errors occur along the way, you can see and address them on the Rx Queue.

  • Change Requests: Pharmacies can initiate electronic change requests when seeking your approval to dispense something other than what you prescribed. If you are a prescriber who has elected to accept change requests, you can see and address them on the Rx Queue.

  • Renewal Requests: Pharmacies can initiate electronic renewal requests when prescriptions are out of refills. If you are a prescriber who has elected to accept renewal requests, you can see and address them on the Rx Queue.

  • Pending Prescriptions: When clinical staff members prepare prescriptions, they appear in the Pending Prescriptions section of the Rx Queue for prescribers to finalize and send.

  • Agent Prescriptions: When authorized users sign and send prescriptions on behalf of an ordering provider, the ordering provider can review and sign off on them on the Rx Queue.

Why Can’t I See the Rx Queue?: If you can’t see the Rx Queue, then your PCC EHR user account has not been configured for PCC eRx, your PCC user role does not have permission to see the Rx Queue, or both. Speak with your practice administrator, or contact PCC Support for help. You can read Set Up PCC eRx User Access to learn more.

Set Your Filters

The Rx Queue is designed to serve different users in different roles. Use the filters at the bottom of the screen to tailor the queue to your role and workflows.

Use the Task Type filter to select the types of prescription activity you want to see. You can further refine by Location and Prescriber. Click “Save My Defaults” to save your most common settings for the next time you log in.

The count at the top of the queue pays attention to your filters so that the number always represents tasks that need your attention.

Work the Queue

You can take action on the Rx Queue to resolve issues and finalize prescriptions.

General Options

Some actions are available in multiple sections of the Rx Queue.

To select all queued prescriptions in a particular section, check the “Select All” checkbox.

To select all queued prescriptions for a particular patient in a section of the queue, click the checkbox beside the patient’s name.

To open a patient’s chart from the Rx Queue, click on their name.

To edit a prescription on the Rx Queue, click the red pencil icon beside it.

Resolve Prescription Errors

Prescription transmission errors can occur when the pharmacy’s system is down, or when Surescripts, the entity that manages the communication between pharmacies and PCC EHR, is unable to process your prescriptions. These transmission issues can prevent prescriptions from reaching the pharmacy. When that happens, PCC eRx displays errors at the top of the Rx Queue.

After encountering an error, PCC makes multiple attempts to send a prescription. If you’d like PCC to stop trying to send the prescription so you can take action yourself, click “Stop Retrying” to end the process.

When a prescription fails to send (or when you tell PCC eRx to stop retrying), you can take one of three actions:

  • Select “Keep” to indicate that you’ve called the pharmacy and resolved the issue.
  • Select “Delete” to delete the prescription.
  • Select “Print” to print the prescription to give to the patient or fax to the pharmacy.

Once you make a selection, click “Resolve” at the bottom of the Prescription Errors section to remove the error from the queue.

Respond to Change Requests

If you are an ordering provider who has change requests enabled for your PCC eRx account, pharmacies may send electronic messages seeking approval to change something about a prescription you wrote.

Pharmacies use change requests to request script clarifications, generic substitutions, therapeutic interchanges, drug use evaluations, or confirmation of a prescribers’ credentials. Pharmacies may also use change requests to notify you when a medication requires prior authorization or is out of stock.

There are five standard ways you can respond to change requests:

  • Keep or Edit Original Prescription: Keep or edit the prescription you originally wrote, then send that in response to the change request.

  • Approve Requested Substitution: Approve the substitution suggested by the pharmacy, either as written or with edits.

  • Replace with New Prescription: Start a new prescription from scratch to replace the original.

  • Cancel Original Prescription: Notify the pharmacy that you want to cancel the original prescription.

  • Reassign: Reassign the change request to a different provider at your practice.

Choose the option that makes sense for your situation, then click “Sign and Process” at the bottom of the Change Requests section to send your response to the pharmacy.

Enable or Disable Change Requests: You will only receive change requests from pharmacies if the change request service is enabled for your user account. Someone at your practice with User Administration privileges in PCC EHR may enable or disable the renewal request service for your account in the User Administration tool. Read Set Up PCC eRx User Access to learn how.

Respond to Renewal Requests

If you are an ordering provider who has renewal requests enabled for your PCC eRx account, pharmacies may send an electronic request for a new prescription when a patient’s original runs out of refills.

There are four standard ways you can respond to renewal requests:

  • Approve __ Fill(s): Approve the pharmacy’s request to renew the original prescription with a specified number of fills.

  • Deny: Deny the pharmacy’s request to renew the original prescription.

  • Replace with new prescription: Start a new prescription from scratch to replace the original.

  • Reassign: Reassign the renewal request to a different provider at your practice.

Choose the option that makes sense for your situation, then click “Sign and Process” at the bottom of the Renewal Requests section to send your response to the pharmacy.

Enable or Disable Renewal Requests: You will only receive renewal requests from pharmacies if the renewal request service is enabled for your user account. Someone at your practice with User Administration privileges in PCC EHR may enable or disable the renewal request service for your account in the User Administration tool. Read Set Up PCC eRx User Access to learn how.

Process Pending Prescriptions

When users create and save prescriptions to send later, they appear on the Rx Queue as Pending Prescriptions. You can review and process pending prescriptions as a batch or one at a time.

To process a pending prescription, select it and click the “Process UNSIGNED Prescriptions” button at the bottom of the Pending Prescriptions section.

Reassign a Pending Prescription to Yourself: Did another prescriber create a new prescription, but not send it? You can approve and send the prescription and become the prescriber. When you process the prescription, PCC eRx will ask you to confirm reassignment.

Sign Agent Prescriptions

Certain users at your practice may be authorized to send prescriptions on behalf of an ordering provider. The ordering provider can view and sign off on those prescriptions on the Rx Queue.

To sign off on an agent prescription, select the prescription and click the “Sign” button at the bottom of the Agent Prescriptions section.

PCC recommends signing off on agent prescriptions on at least a weekly basis to keep your records up to date and support optimal performance of the Rx Queue.

Special Cases

Learn how to handle special scenarios that sometimes crop up on the Rx Queue.

Find Patient Matches for Unmatched Pharmacy Requests

Sometimes pharmacies send requests for patients that PCC EHR does not recognize.

When PCC EHR is not able to find a patient match for a particular pharmacy request, the patient name header appears orange with red text.

You may see “## Potential Matches” next to the patient’s name, which means PCC EHR has found patients with similar names.

Click on the patient’s name header and pick from the list of potential matches. You can also search for a different name.

Once you have found and selected a matching patient, the request displays on the Rx Queue with the matched patient’s name (your name for the patient). You can proceed as usual to approve or deny the request.

Review Printed Prescriptions

If a member of your clinical staff or a Provider Agent prints a prescription for a prescriber to sign and approve, the prescription is considered complete and sent and does not appear on the Rx Queue for review.

If your practice wishes for printed prescriptions to appear in the Provider Agent or Pending Prescriptions sections on the Rx Queue, PCC can change that setting for your practice.

Find Incomplete Orders by Date Range and Order Type

/in /by

Use the Orders by Visit report to find incomplete orders for a date range, or all orders of a specific type.

You can work with patient orders in several places in PCC EHR, and depending on your focus, each place is useful. You can update an order in the patient chart; you can see open orders for a day in the Tasks column on the Schedule screen; and you can review a list of all orders on the Visit Tasks queue.

What about orders that have been open for a while? What if you need to see all orders of a specific type (such as referrals) in one list, in order to see how your practice is doing?

The Orders by Visit report finds all patient encounters in a selected date range and displays orders associated with those appointments. The report can be filtered by provider, order name, order status, and location (for multi-location practices).

Example: Find All Incomplete Referrals From the Previous Month

If you need to see all referrals from the past month that are not complete, how can you get that list quickly without combing through the Visit Tasks queue? Use the Orders by Visit report to create a list.

 

Open the Orders by Visit report

From the Reports menu, select Report Library, and then click on the Orders by Visit report.


Enter encounter criteria

Enter a date range for your search. You can also optionally filter by provider and/or location.

Select the order(s) to display in the report

Click in the Order Name field and either use the scroll bar or the Search field to find and select the order(s) you wish to track.

You can select a group of orders by using the search feature and the “Select All” button.

Select “Not Completed”

Select “Not Completed” in the Order Status field to find orders with outstanding issues.

Click “Generate”

Click the “Generate” button to run the report.


You can print or export the list so that you can work through each order. You can also click “Back” to return to the criteria screen and adjust the output.

Set Up PCC eRx User Access

/in /by

Before a clinician or staff member can prescribe medications or modify a patient’s medication information, they must have PCC eRx enabled on their user account in PCC EHR. Follow the procedure in this article below to enable PCC eRx for providers or any staff at your practice.

Who Needs PCC eRx Access?: Any clinical or non-clinical staff may be granted access to PCC eRx. While all PCC EHR users can open charts and review Medication History, a staff member needs to have their PCC eRx account enabled in order to update patient pharmacy, medication allergy, or other information, as well as to work with prescriptions.

Watch a Video: You can learn how to set up and administrate PCC eRx user accounts by watching the PCC eRx – Set Up Staff and Clinicians video.

Configure a User’s eRx Access in PCC EHR

When you are ready to set up a PCC eRx user account, follow this procedure.

Open the User Administration Tool

Open the User Administration tool in the Tools menu.

Who Can Do This?: Your practice has one or more PCC administrators who are allowed to make changes to accounts. If you do not know your PCC administrators, contact PCC Support.

Double-Click to Open a User Account

Double-click on any user to edit their account information.

For Prescribers, Update Name, Credentials, and Double-Check License and Other IDs

If the user you selected will be sending prescriptions, review the First, Middle, and Last Name fields, along with the Professional Suffix. These identifiers will be used to create the eRx account, and they will appear on prescriptions.

Next, if the prescriber will be sending prescriptions with their own credentials, double-check that their identifiers are entered in the State License, NPI, and DEA fields.

Click the PCC eRx Tab

Click on the PCC eRx tab to set up prescribing roles and other options for the user.

Enable the User’s PCC eRx Account

Click “Enabled” to activate the patient’s PCC eRx account.

Select a Prescriber Role

Choose a Prescriber Role for the user. As you make a selection, PCC EHR will briefly summarize the abilities and responsibilities of each role.

Each Prescriber Role indicates certain permissions or levels of prescribing ability. You can see a description of the selected role at the bottom of the list. For a complete guide to PCC eRx Prescriber Roles, read the section below.

If you have not entered a required piece identification for the selected prescriber level, you will see a warning message.

Choose Prescriber Locations and Default Location

Select each of the locations where this user will be working with prescriptions. Pick a default location to help speed up their prescribing workflow.

Why Do I Need to Enter Locations and a Default Location?: Every prescription must have a prescribing location. PCC eRx automatically determines the location based on the encounter location; if a prescription is made for a well visit at a particular office, PCC eRx will assume that location. However, prescriptions made in the context of a portal message or other encounter for which there is no location must also have an official location. Use the first field to indicate at which locations a prescriber is authorized to prescribe. Next, indicate which location should be selected by default if the prescriber’s location can not be automatically determined.

Optionally, Enable Electronic Prescribing for Controlled Substances (EPCS), Renewal Requests, and Change Requests

If the user is a Provider or Mid-Level Provider, select the service level(s) they will require to carry out their work.

  • EPCS: The EPCS service enables prescribers to prescribe controlled substances electronically. Prescribers can complete the enrollment process later. For more information, read Register for EPCS.

  • Electronic Renewal Request Service: The electronic renewal request service enables pharmacies to submit renewal requests for patient prescriptions directly into PCC EHR.

  • Electronic Change Request Service: The electronic change request service enables pharmacies to submit change requests for patient prescriptions directly into PCC EHR.

Local regulations and user preference will influence which service levels you select.

Add Optional Permissions

Indicate whether or not the user needs access to reports that are embedded inside PCC eRx, and whether or not the user is a PCC eRx Administrator for your practice.

PCC eRx Reporting: PCC EHR includes a collection of PCC eRx reports in the Report Library. The user does not need this permission to access those reports. The PCC eRx reporting tools are reports built into PCC eRx.

PCC eRx Administrators: Your practice should have at least one PCC eRx Administrator. When you complete the EPCS process, you must have an administrator at your practice (who is not yourself).

Check that the User Has Access to the Rx Queue

Click on the “Role Assignment” tab at the top of the window and scroll through the permission list until you reach “Queues”. Check that the “Rx Queue” permission is selected.

If it is not, use the “Role(s)” drop-down to assign the user a different role that has permission to access the Rx Queue. You can also modify the permissions for their current role or create a new role once you save the changes you already made to their account.

Click “Save”

Click “Save” to save your account changes. The user will be able to use PCC eRx immediately.

Password Error: If the user has an old password that does not meet PCC EHR’s minimum requirements, you may see a password error. The user must change their password before you can continue, or you can change their password for them. PCC EHR passwords must be at least eight characters and may not contain words such as “password” or the user’s name.

Under the Hood: Prescribers Should be Linked to Billing Provider Entries

Certain prescribing functions require that the PCC EHR user’s account be linked to the appropriate billing provider listing in Partner, PCC’s practice management system. You can review that table for all prescribers and make sure that each one is linked to the appropriate PCC EHR user.

PCC eRx Prescriber Roles

When you enable PCC eRx for a PCC EHR user, you must select a PCC eRx Prescriber Role. Each role grants certain permissions and abilities. Higher-level roles include all the permissions and abilities of the roles that precede it.

  • Non-Clinical Staff: A user with the Non-Clinical Staff role cannot create or send prescriptions. They can update a patient’s pharmacies, and review all the information in the patient’s PCC eRx chart section. They cannot record a patient’s drug allergy information or medication history.

  • Clinical Staff: A user with the Clinical Staff role can create prescriptions. They cannot send them, but they can print them out for the physician. A higher-level user must review and process the prescriptions, either on the printed version, in the patient’s chart, or on the Rx Queue.

  • Provider Agent: A user with the Provider Agent role can create and send prescriptions for legend drugs, and can prepare (but not send) prescriptions for controlled substances. Although Provider Agent prescriptions for legend drugs send immediately, they are technically sent on behalf of an ordering provider. Ordering providers should routinely review and sign off on Provider Agent prescriptions on the Rx Queue.

  • Mid-Level Provider: A user with the Mid-Level Provider role can create and send prescriptions with their own credentials. Mid-Level Provider prescriptions include details of the prescriber’s supervising provider as required by the local jurisdiction.

  • Provider: Providers may create and send prescriptions under their own provider credentials.

What Role Should I Give My MA, LNA, LPN, RN, etc?: PCC eRx Prescriber Roles may not directly align with the clinical roles or titles you use at your practice. As your practice’s PCC eRx Administrator, you should assign eRx roles based on the skills and responsibilities of the individual. For example, if you wish for an individual to be able to send prescriptions, they must be at the level of Provider Agent or higher. Users who need to be able to prepare prescriptions must be at the level of Clinical Staff or higher. Your practice may decide to assign all RNs a specific role, or you may choose to grant certain permissions to certain staff members based on their credentials, experience, state or local laws, or other factors.

Hide Sensitive Diagnoses from the Patient Portal and Patient Reports

/in /by

In PCC EHR, you can mark any diagnosis or Problem List, allergy, or Family Medical History list item as private. A private or “locked” diagnosis will not appear on patient reports and it will not appear in the patient portal.

Confidential Notes: You can also add confidential notes to a chart, which keeps them hidden on the screen when reviewing a chart. Click here to read more about confidential notes.

Hide a Single Patient’s Diagnosis or Problem

When you want to hide a single diagnosis for a specific patient, just de-select the “Include on Patient Reports” checkbox in the Diagnoses component right on the chart note.

A red lock icon will appear, and the diagnosis will not be visible in the patient portal, the Patient Visit Summary, or other patient reports for that visit.

What About Labs?: Labs and other orders can be hidden the same way while charting a visit. You will need to be in “Edit” mode in order to access the “Include on Patient Reports” checkbox.

Similarly, you can hide a Problem List item for the patient, from the Medical Summary section of the chart. Just click the lock icon next to the item on the Problem List.

A hidden problem will not appear on patient reports like the Patient Visit Summary, and it will not appear in the patient portal for users who have access to the patient’s records.


Where Does a Locked Diagnosis Still Appear? How Do I Send Records?

A hidden or “locked” diagnosis does not appear in the patient portal for any user, nor does it appear on reports like the Patient Visit Summary. However, it does appear in other places.

First, you can see all diagnoses on the chart note itself, which is available in the Visit History section of the chart. If you attempt to print a chart note, PCC EHR will warn you that it contains a sensitive diagnosis.


When you wish to send records out for a referral or for a transition of care, use the Summary of Care Record. You can select whether or not to include locked diagnoses as you generate the output.


What About pocketPCC?: The pocketPCC mobile application provides clinicians with the same access to patient information as PCC EHR. Locked diagnoses will display as they do in PCC EHR, with a red lock icon.

Hidden Orders and Diagnoses Appear on Time of Service Receipts: An order or diagnosis that is hidden will still appear on a time of service receipt, if it is generated after the charges have been posted.

Configure Default Hidden Diagnoses

Your practice can configure any diagnosis to be hidden or “locked” by default for all patients. You can also apply the change retroactively for all historical diagnoses.

When you wish to make a diagnosis hidden by default, open the Diagnosis Configuration tool and select a diagnosis.



When a patient has a diagnosis somewhere in their chart, by default it is “included on patient reports” and in the patient portal. To change this default status to private, simply uncheck the “Include on Patient Reports” box. When you do this, you will see the lock next to the description close and change to red.


Hide Historical Diagnoses: When you change the default status to private, your change will apply to all future diagnoses. Existing diagnoses on patient problem lists or patient charts for past visits will still be visible. To make past diagnoses private, check the box labeled “Apply historically throughout all patient charts”. This step cannot be reversed and only works one way; you cannot unlock all past diagnoses or undo this step once you have completed it. Once you click “Save”, all instances of that diagnosis will be hidden from the patient portal and patient reports for all patients.

Configure Visit Statuses in PCC EHR

/in /by

PCC comes with a set of visit statuses that you can use to indicate patient status on the schedule screen. PCC encourages each practice to configure its own visit statuses to compliment the practice’s workflow.

Customize Your Practice’s Visit Statuses

You can add any number of statuses to the ones already in PCC EHR, and you can select a color for each status.

Use the Visit Status Configuration tool to add or remove statuses. You can adjust their color and add or remove them from the Visit Status cycle.


Visit Statuses appear on the Schedule queue as well as at the top of the chart note. Your practice can click to move stepwise through the cycle, or click on the arrow to select any Visit Status manually.

Selecting Colors: Choosing colors for visit statuses that are easy to differentiate but also compliment each other can be challenging if you don’t have a few art classes under your belt. Two good online resources for creating color palettes are color.adobe.com and paletton.com.

Click a status to cycle to the next on the list

Customize Your Visit Status Counters

Each PCC EHR user can configure their own Visit Status Counters. These counters appear at the bottom of your PCC EHR screen, letting you know at a glance the number of patients that are marked with specific statuses.

Visit Status Counters show you a count of a specific status, based on your personal user preference and your Schedule queue filters.

You can use the My Account tool to choose several different statuses to track. Each will appear in your practice’s custom color for that status.



Use the Visit Status Counters drop-down in the My Account tool to select which statuses you want to keep track of during the day.

Can I Set This Up For My Staff?: Each user can define their Visit Status Counters in the My Account tool. An administrator can also set up Visit Status Counters for other users in the User Administration tool.

Receive and Send Patient Portal Messages in pocketPCC

/in /by

You can use pocketPCC to view and respond to portal messages from your patients. You can work with messages on the Messaging queue; and you can send, read, and respond to messages while viewing a patient’s chart.

Work with Portal Messages in the Messaging Queue

To go to your messaging queue, open pocketPCC and select Messaging from the main menu.

Messaging option in the main menu
Show the queue

Click on any message in the queue to read, add a task, or reply to the message. That reply will go directly to the patient portal user who sent the original message.


If your practice uses a custom message protocol, some components that are available in PCC EHR may not appear in pocketPCC.

Work with Portal Messages in a Patient’s Visit History

You can review and reply to portal messages while working with a patient’s chart in pocketPCC.

To view portal messages, click on the chart menu and select “Visit History.”


Here you can see all chart notes, phone notes, portal messages and other encounters associated with the patient. If you want to see only portal messages, you can filter the history using the gear button.


Select the portal message you want to interact with, and click Edit to make notes or send a reply.


click edit to send a reply or add a task

While editing a note, you can add tasks for yourself or a staff member. You can also send a reply to the message.


Send a New Portal Message to a Patient

You can send a new portal message to a patient or family member who uses the patient portal.

First, find the patient and open their chart. Then select “Add Portal Message” from the chart menu.

chart drop-down menu
create message

If more than one portal user has access to the patient’s records, you will be prompted to select the correct recipient from a pull-down menu.

create message pop-up

Enter a Subject and Message and click “Send” to deliver the message. The portal user will receive an e-mail letting them know a portal message is waiting for them.

Patient Portal Messages vs. Direct Secure Messaging: The patient portal and PCC EHR support two different messaging technologies. Portal messages are a secure, optional messaging tool built into the patient portal. Patient portal users can exchange messages with their pediatric practice, and the practice can receive and send portal messages with PCC EHR or pocketPCC. Direct Secure Messaging, on the other hand, is a specialized message technology used to share and send medical information. It requires registration with a third-party service and it allows for secure transmission of C-CDA transition of care documents or visit summaries. For more information, refer to Receive and Respond to Portal Messages or Direct Secure Messaging.

Add an Attachment Code to a Claim

/in , /by

If a secondary insurance requires the EOB from the primary, or any claim requires a certificate of medical necessity, discharge summary, or other clinical documentation, you can add attachment codes to a visit’s charges, generate a unique attachment ID, and specify the attachment type and method. Attachment information will then be sent with the electronic claim.

When a claim requires an attachment, open the Correct Mistakes (oops) program in the Practice Management and use Visit Status to select the visit’s charges. (For more details, read Edit an Encounter’s Diagnoses, Billing Provider, and Other Claim Information in Correct Mistakes.)


Next, press Page Down to see the claim information for the visit’s charges.


Press F3 – Add Attachment to add an attachment. PCC will generate a unique attachment ID for the selected charges, and you can declare the attachment Type and Method. If you add an attachment by mistake, you can press F3 – Remove Attachment. When you are finished, save your changes and then re-batch the charges to the desired insurance payer.

Attachment information will appear on the claim when PCC generates it, and a Claim Attachment billing message will appear in the billing history.

Single Use Only: Attachments require unique IDs. After you re-batch and generate the claim, the Partner billing system will remove the attachment ID, type, and method from the charges. You can review the information in the charge history, but if you need to resubmit the claim you will need to return to the Visit Status screen and add the attachment again.

Set Default Values for Attachment Codes on Claims: Your practice can optionally set default values for the attachment type and transmission method in the Charge and Payment Posting section of the Configuration Editor (ced). For example, if you always send attachments via regular mail, you can change the default from “Fax” to “Mail”.

Ask PCC For a Software Feature or Enhancement

/in /by

PCC uses your requests and comments to help decide which features and services to develop. We depend on your feedback; we can’t make software without you.

Read the article below to learn the best way to submit a feature enhancement request.

Step 1: Determine the Need Behind Your Request

The most important step to effectively communicate your feature or enhancement request to PCC is to clearly understand the need.

PCC is dedicated to removing obstacles to practicing medicine. What obstacles are you facing, and how are they interfering with your workflow, slowing down your day, and preventing you from providing care to your patients?

As an example, you may have in mind a “feature request” for PCC, such as:

  • a new screen where I can enter additional vaccine information
  • a new blood pressure field on the chart note
  • a nurse messaging feature in PCC EHR

…however, if you ask for the button, screen, or field you have in mind as a solution, PCC may struggle to understand what you wish to accomplish.

Instead, work with your clinicians or talk to PCC Support to discover the underlying need behind the request. Such as:

  • My practice needs to track and report NDC codes for immunization lots when reporting to a state agency in order to be certified. Otherwise, we will not receive a program’s incentive payment.
  • We sometimes record infant Blood Pressure on the patient’s leg, so we need to be able to indicate the leg to properly record that information in the patient’s chart, so we can compare “apples-to-apples” when looking at BP measurements over time.
  • My nurses don’t know when they need to do a venipuncture. I need a way to tell them, or they will enter the room and not bring the proper equipment with them.

Bonus Surprise Solutions: When you work to identify the problem, sometimes PCC can help you find a solution that you may not have been aware of. PCC’s products have a lot of little-known features, and your PCC Client Advocate can help you discover great new workflow solutions. For example… did you know that PCC software can already track NDC codes, indicate that blood pressure was taken on a leg, and alert nurses to specific orders?

Step 2: Send Your Request to support@pcc.com

PCC carefully reviews and responds to every communication sent to support@pcc.com. We love to hear how PCC might improve your workflow and help you in your day-to-day efforts to improve quality of care.

When you craft your message to PCC Support, what can you write that will help best communicate your request?

Consider the following tips:

  • Use PCC's Magic User Story Formula: Try to craft your e-mail in the following structure: “As a… I need… so that…”. For example, “As a clinician, I need a way to indicate that I took blood pressure on the infant’s left leg, so that I am properly charting how I took blood pressure and all of my clinicians can understand the chart record and BP history later.” When you use this format, PCC will be certain to have the basic information they need to understand your request.

  • Talk to Your Client Advocate: Before and after you send your request, be sure and share your needs with your Client Advocate during your regularly scheduled PCC Support call. PCC Support wants to make sure your voice is heard, and they can help explore existing solutions or gather additional details that may help clarify your request.

Step 3: What Else Can I Do?

Now that PCC is tracking your enhancement request, is there anything else you can do about your need?

  • Offer to Provide Research Guidance: Can PCC call you and your staff and talk about your needs? When you send a request to PCC, let them know that you are available for an interview about the issue. During the research and development process, we interview Subject Matter Experts (SMEs), and the insight of you and your colleagues can be enormously helpful.

  • Offer to Be a Beta Tester or Pilot Tester: Does your practice have a high tolerance for disruption? Consider offering your practice as a beta or pilot tester for early, unfinished software. We test new software components, features, and releases with practices that care about the features and can test them thoroughly. Speak to your Client Advocate about becoming one of PCC’s beta or pilot testers.

  • Attend the PCC Users' Conference: PCC’s annual UC is a great environment to discuss the problems your practice is facing. You can use our Wishing Well and Roadmap planning sessions to voice your needs, and you can find other practices that have similar challenges and explore solutions together. At our Roadmap planning session, we invite you to participate in identifying priorities among all the different needs and requests that pediatric offices share.

  • Find Other Solutions on PCCTalk: PCCTalk is an online forum where PCC-using practices discuss problems and solutions, from coding to practice workflow. If you ask how other offices have dealt with an issue, they may surprise you with inventive solutions that PCC Support may not know about.

    Note: PCC does not use PCCTalk as a source of enhancement requests or to solicit feature feedback. We do not “count votes” from PCCTalk and rarely add PCCTalk user comments to our tracking software.

  • Stay Tuned for PCC Futures, New Release Web Labs, and PCC Documentation: PCC is always building new software and services to meet client needs. A solution may already be on its way! If you read The Pulse, PCC’s newsfeed, you’ll be notified about PCC Futures and all release announcements so that you’ll be the first to learn about exciting new improvements.

  • Try Again, Ask For an Update, Talk More!: It doesn’t hurt to periodically check in about your requests! When you talk with your Client Advocate, be sure and continue to share the different challenges your practice is facing and how you’d like PCC to help. Once again, refer back to rule #1: always describe your challenge and how it interferes with your practice’s efforts to care for patients. PCC pays special attention to those challenges, and what we hear helps steer our software development as well as future services and strategic choices that we make long-term.

PCC’s entire reason for existing is to solve the problems your practice is facing, and we need your help to do it! As always, call or e-mail PCC Support at any time to discuss how we can help your practice meet new challenges.

Report on Lab Test Results in PCC EHR

/in /by

You can report on lab test results in the Report Library in PCC EHR.

Run the Test Results Report

In the Report Library in PCC EHR, open the Test Results report from the Clinical category.

Set up the report filters. You can filter the report based on lab order date, test name, test status, encounter location, and lab facility. Note that you can only report on lab tests that you have ordered in PCC EHR at least once. For e-labs, you need to have received results for a given test at least once before you can include it on your report.

Generate the report. As you view the results, you can change which columns appear, drag them to rearrange their order, group the results, and change their sort order.

You can print the results or export them for use in a spreadsheet program, then share the report with anyone who needs to see it. When you export results to CSV format, the subelements of names (e.g., first, last) and addresses (e.g., street, city, state) split into separate columns so that they are easier to work with in a spreadsheet program.

When to Expect a CLIA Number: You will only see CLIA numbers in your report results for tests performed at lab facilities that are associated with a scheduling location in PCC EHR.

Use the Test Results Report Instead of the Lab Test Report: The Test Results report in the Report Library does everything and more than the Lab Test report, which you can continue to access in the Reports menu in PCC EHR.

Customize the Test Results Report

You can create custom versions of the Test Results report. On custom reports, you can set up your own default search criteria and tailor the columns and sort order of the final output.

Open the Test Results report in the Report Library and click “Customize Report”.

In the customization window, pick the columns that you want to make available on the report and set up default search criteria.

When you have finished customizing the report, preview the results and adjust which columns are visible, the order in which they appear, and the order in which results sort. Then, save your custom report.

Whenever you run the custom report, it will remember your settings.

Schedule the Test Results Report

If you need to run the Test Results report on a regular basis, you can schedule it to run automatically at regular intervals.

Open the version of the report that you want to schedule in the Report Library and click the “Schedule” button.

Name the schedule and pick how often and what time of day it should run.

The “Next Run” field will show you when the report is next scheduled to generate based on the criteria you set up. Click “Schedule” to finish scheduling your report to run automatically.

Scheduled reports appear on the Scheduled Reports tab in the Report Library, where you can change, stop, and re-start schedules.

You can view the results of your scheduled reports on the Saved Results tab in the Report Library.

When to Use the Test Results Report

You can use the Test Results report to gather information for lead and COVID test reporting to your regional health department.

First, make sure your practice records these tests using discrete lab tests in PCC EHR.

Next, run the report and select a date range and the tests you perform.

Make sure the report results are organized the way your state requires, then export the report to a CSV file.


If you need to make further adjustments, you can import the results into a spreadsheet program on your workstation (Excel, OpenOffice, etc.) and finish customizing the output to match your state’s requirements. When the report is ready, send it to your state!

For help configuring your lead and COVID tests, or creating and exporting a lead or COVID test report, contact PCC Support.

Configure User Selection Lists

/in /by

There are a number of places in PCC EHR where you select from a list of EHR users. For example, you can filter a queue so that it displays only users that you want to follow:

And you can choose from a selection list when you assign an order or a task to a user:

Your practice can adjust the user selection list to make it easier and clearer to use.

When you want to customize your practice’s user selection list, go to the User Administration tool and select the User Selection List tab.


You can sort users in three ways. The first two options allow you to sort user lists by either last name or first name.

Keep disabled users on bottom: If you have disabled users that you would rather not sort through, you can force them to the bottom of either of the alphabetical sort lists by selecting the “Keep disabled users on bottom” check box.

If you would like to create your own sort order, choose the “Manually arrange” option. In this mode you can drag and drop users to appear anywhere you want in the list. You could use this to put all nurses at the top of the list, for example.

User Name Format: Use the menu at the bottom of this window to choose how you want the names in your lists to display: First Name and then Last Name; Last Name and then First Name; or Full Name. Note that the Full Name option displays the name from the Full Name field in the User Account Administration tool, which may not match the First Name and Last Name fields.

Care Centers: If you use PCC’s Care Center features, you can select a unique user order for each Care Center.

The snomedmap Report

/in /by

The snomedmap program is a collection of custom reports that you can use to understand the relationship between the clinical SNOMED-CT and billing ICD-10 diagnosis codes you use on your PCC system.

For example, you can use the snomedmap report to:

  • Review common SNOMED diagnoses that are mapped to an ICD-10 code that changed as part of an annual ICD-10 code update
  • Review all the diagnoses in your practice’s PCC EHR Favorite diagnoses list that lack a default ICD-10 code
  • Review a list of your 50 most commonly used diagnosis descriptions (whether they have a default mapping or not)
  • Review the entire list of SNOMED diagnosis descriptions that lack a mapped ICD-10 billing code

Open the snomedmap Program and Run a Report

You can run snomedmap from your Practice Management windows. Contact PCC Support if you need help adding the report to your window.

Choose a report from the list at the top to see a description at the bottom of the screen.

Press F1 – Generate Report to generate a report.

Periodic Code Set Updates

When a code set update takes place, PCC adds custom reports to snomedmap to help practices prepare for the changes.

For example, PCC updates all practices for each annual ICD-10 code set update. After an update, your practice can use the snomedmap report to research any changes to codes that you use. A new annual mapping report, “Favorite SNOMEDs mapped to Deleted or Modified year/date ICD-10″ will appear at the top of the snomedmap report.


The report will show you all of your practice’s Favorites that are affected by the ICD-10 update. Since a diagnosis is marked as a Favorite once it is used, the report can give you a good overview of billing issues you might encounter when the new code set takes effect.

You can use the Billing Configuration tool in PCC EHR to update your mappings for codes you use.

What If I Do Not Update My ICD-10 Mapping?: If you do not configure a diagnosis billing code for a SNOMED description, and there’s no assisted mapping offered by the National Library of Medicine, clinicians may not see an ICD-10 code when they select a diagnosis on a chart note in PCC EHR. Instead, they can select a code on the Bill window (the “electronic encounter form”), or your biller can make a selection later when they post charges. Contact PCC Support for help with these tools.

Update Your SNOMED to ICD-10 Billing Mapping in PCC EHR

After you review reports in snomemap, you may wish to use the Billing Configuration tool to adjust which ICD-10 diagnoses are mapped to the SNOMED-CT descriptions in PCC EHR.


By using snomedmap and the PCC EHR Billing Configuration tool, your practice can review your most common billing codes that are affected by code updates and optionally make changes to your billing mapping.

Review Other Diagnosis Mapping Reports

In addition to code update reports, the snomedmap program includes useful reports for reviewing code mapping on your PCC system.

Select “Commonly Used SNOMED Descriptions…” to see a list of your 50 most common diagnoses for the past year and review their ICD-10 mapping.



This list is a great way to check out the default ICD-10 code mapping for your common diagnoses. If you disagree with how a diagnosis will be billed in ICD-10, or if a diagnosis has no assisted mapping, you can use the Billing Configuration tool to make changes.

Select “Favorite SNOMED Descriptions…” to review diagnoses on your Favorites list that lack a mapped ICD-10 code. The output will include the number of times your practice used each diagnosis in the past year.

You can use the Billing Configuration tool in PCC EHR to map ICD-10 codes to SNOMED descriptions.

Schedule a Patient

/in /by

Use the Appointment Book in PCC EHR to schedule appointments, review and make changes to providers’ schedules, and place scheduling blocks.

Watch a Video: You can learn how to schedule a patient by watching Schedule a Patient in the Appointment Book and Schedule for Providers Across Multiple Locations.

Schedule an Appointment

For a simple overview of scheduling in the Appointment Book, use the following steps.

Open the Appointment Book

Click on the Appointment Book icon to open the Appointment Book.

Find the Patient

Type the patient’s name, phone number, or other details into the Patient Name field to search for a patient.

If you’re looking for a recently accessed patient or their sibling, you can select their name from the drop-down list.

Siblings appear on the list for easy access. If you are scheduling for a patient who has never been to your practice before, you may need to add the patient and family account to your system.

Review and Update Patient Details

Click on the patient’s name to review basic information, such as recent vitals, gender identity details, and their primary care provider.

Depending on your practice’s configuration, the Patient Details window may open automatically when you find a patient. You can also click the “Details” button to open it. Use the customizable Patient Details ribbon to verify and update items in the patient’s chart as you schedule.

Click “Edit” to add or edit information.

You can update insurance information and then check the patient’s eligibility (based on today’s date).

Select a Visit Reason

Your practice’s default visit reason will appear in the Visit Reason field. You can type or select a different visit reason.


The clinician’s configured visit length will appear next to the reason.

Select Location and Provider

The Appointment Book remembers which location and provider you last scheduled for and defaults to those settings. You can select a different provider and/or location at any time during the scheduling process.

Find an Open Time in the Schedule

Click anywhere on the grid to pick an appointment time.

If there’s an obstacle in the calendar, an error message will display in the scheduling panel.

Enter an Appointment Note

Optionally enter notes about the appointment in the Appointment Note field. Appointment notes will be available on the Schedule screen, the top of the chart note, and anywhere your practice works with the encounter.

Save the Appointment

Click “Save” to confirm the appointment. The details of the new appointment will be shown on the left side of the screen.

Open the Appointment Book

Open the Appointment Book with the Appointment Book icon at the bottom of your PCC EHR window.


You can also select the Appointment Book from the File menu. You can also use the My Account tool to configure the Appointment Book to open as soon as you log in.

Review the Appointment Book, Provider’s Schedules, and Locations

Days in the past are shaded with a dotted pattern, which appears much like a curtain over the days. Today’s column will include a blue header, and a blue line will appear down the left side of the day, clearly dividing the past from the present.

If your practice chooses to assign Visit Types, you may see color-coded guidance on the calendar to help schedulers see when certain types of appointments should be scheduled. You may also see colored stripes on the left of scheduled visits, indicating the actual visit type.

When you click on a time slot in the calendar that has open space, the Appointment Book will assume that you are attempting to schedule, and will select the available appointment space.

If the selected time slot has space for multiple appointments, the already-scheduled appointments will appear stacked, accordion-style, on the left side of the screen.

You can click on each scheduled appointment, either in the accordion or on the appointment grid to see details for that appointment.

View Multiple Providers’ Schedules

When a patient needs an appointment right away, it’s helpful to see availability for all of your providers at one time.

View Schedules Only for Providers Who Are Working on a Single Day

When you’re trying to schedule a visit, but your practice has several providers who work in different locations, use the “Day Working” view to see only providers who are scheduled to work for the selected day and location.

You can navigate through the calendar day by day and you will still see only the providers who are available at that location on the given day.

If you prefer to see all providers, regardless of their availability, use the “Day All” view.

View Schedules for All Providers

Click on the “Day All” button to see all of your providers, regardless of where they are working on a given day.

If you don’t already have a day selected, the current day will be displayed.

View Multiple Locations Simultaneously

If your practice has multiple locations, the Appointment Book will include color-coded location banners and an “All Locations” checkbox by default, to make it easier to differentiate between your scheduling locations at a glance.

When you need to schedule for a provider who works in multiple locations, you can click the “All Locations” checkbox to show all practice locations where the selected provider has appointment availability.

You will be able to see and schedule appointments for the provider on one screen, regardless of where they are working that day.

Turn Off Default Locations: Location banners and the “All Locations” checkbox are enabled by default if your practice has more than one scheduling location. If you prefer not to use either of these features, you can turn them off in the Practice Preferences configuration tool.

If you are scheduling in the Day Working view, and “All Locations” is selected, you will see all providers who are working that day, regardless of their location. The location banner will display which office they are working in throughout the day.

Care Center Locations: If your practice uses care centers, schedulers will only see the locations within their own care center.

Customize Locations: You can assign colors to your locations in the Practice Preferences tool.

Schedule Appointments: Use Visit Types and the Availability Finder

What time is the first available sick visit for Dr. Casey today? When is the first available well visit slot after the patient’s well visit due date?

You can use the Availability Finder tool to find the next open time slot for a specific Visit Type.

You can also use the Select Appointment Date & Time window for a more visual approach.

Note: Your practice will need to have Visit Types configured, as well as color-coded templates for your providers, to use the following features.

Search for the Next Open Time Slot for a Specific Visit Type by Color

When you select a visit reason in the Schedule Appointment panel, the Availability Finder color swatch will display the same visit type color.

Note: If your practice does not use Visit Types, or does not color code provider scheduling templates, you can change the default setting for your availability searches to look for any open time slots.

You can use the Availability Finder arrows to jump to the next open time slot for that visit type.


In the above image, the user clicked the right arrow, and the Appointment Book automatically selected the next available sick time.

You can click to select that slot, enter an Appointment Note, and click “Save” to schedule. Or, you can continue clicking the right arrow to see additional open time slots with that visit type.

What about well visits? When you schedule a well visit, you typically start looking after the patient’s next physical due date, or whatever date in the future you want to begin the search.


The Appointment Book will jump to that date. Then you can use the right arrow to find the first open Well Visit time.

If you don’t want the first appointment found, continue to click the right arrow to find the next opening. The Appointment Book will continue on to the next day and scroll the screen for you, or even flip to the next week. You can use the left arrow if you want to go back to the last offered time slot.

When you find the date and time you want, click on the time slot to begin scheduling.

None Available: If there are no available appointments for the selected criteria, you’ll see a temporary message in the scheduling panel, which will disappear after a few seconds.

If you need to open up the search to include other visit types, you can click on the color swatch to reveal a drop-down selection of other visit types.

What Are Those Weird Looking Visit Types?: Use the “A” visit type to ignore the color swatch and find the next open slot for any of your visit types. Select “U” to look only for open time on the schedule with no assigned visit type.

Use the Select Appointment Date & Time Window to See All Available Visit Slots For Any Day

While clicking arrows to jump to the next available time slot can be handy, sometimes you want to see a broader view of open slots on your practice calendar.

Use the Select Appointment Date & Time window to see available time slots for a selected Visit Type, over the next six months.

Click on the Calendar icon to open the Select Appointment Date & Time window.


When you need to find an opening for a sick or well visit (or any visit type), you can adjust the criteria within the Appointment Criteria panel on the left. You can set a different provider, location, or visit type.

The Select Appointment Date panel in the center will show every day that includes availability matching your selected criteria. Days with availability will be highlighted in the color matching the Visit Type you selected. Days that are shaded with a dotted pattern have no time slots that match your criteria.

Click on a day within one of the calendars to see appointment availability, by provider, in the Select Appointment Time panel on the right.

When you find an open time slot that works for you, click the time button to return to your schedule.

The Appointment Book will open to your chosen date and time for the provider selected.

You can make changes in the scheduling panel if you need to, and then click “Save” to confirm the appointment.

Use the “All Locations” Feature in the Select Appointment Date & Time Window

When you select “All Locations” within the Select Appointment Date & Time window, you can view provider availability across all of your locations, six months at a time.

The Select Appointment Time panel on the right will include color swatches and location abbreviations to indicate which location has availability.

Schedule Siblings or Multiple Patients Simultaneously

When searching for a patient, click the plus button to the right of the search box to open the Schedule Multiple Appointments window.


On the Schedule Multiple Appointments window you have the option to select multiple patients: find your first patient, select your visit reason, and enter any appointment notes. As you select each patient, another patient name search box will appear, and you can then search for another patient—either a sibling of the first patient, or any other patient.

Every time you add a patient, a new patient name search box will appear below for the next patient. Enter as many patients as you need, then click “Continue”.

Each patient appears in the schedule appointment panel, and you can select an available time slot exactly as you would with a single patient. If there’s not enough space available for all appointments, the block of appointments appear with a red border, indicating the overlap with existing appointments.

If your user account has permission to force in appointments, you can click Force to save all appointments despite the overlap.

Select a different time slot, where all the appointments fit, and you’ll be able to save without forcing in the appointments.

After scheduling multiple appointments, each can be edited, rescheduled, or canceled individually, just like any other appointment.

Schedule a Telemedicine Appointment

You can indicate that an appointment is telemedicine and optionally enter connection information for the appointment.

For a complete guide to scheduling and completing telemedicine appointments in PCC EHR, see Schedule, Chart, and Bill a Telemedicine Visit in PCC EHR.

Appointment Book Feature Reference

The Appointment Book includes several built-in features to keep your practice’s scheduling going smoothly and efficiently.

Open the Appointment Book Automatically

Users can choose to have the Appointment Book launch automatically every time they log in.

Set individual preferences in the My Account tool from the File menu.

Scale the Appointment Book to See More of Your Day

Adjust the scale slider in the upper-right corner of the Appointment Book to adjust how much of the day appears on your screen.

You can “zoom out” to see more of the day and find open time slots.

PCC EHR will remember your preferred scale, even if you log out.

Color-Code Your Schedule by Visit Type

On a busy schedule, you need to save time slots for sick visits and other types of visits that are scheduled late. You may also want to let schedulers know that some visit types need to be scheduled with specific providers or only on certain days.

If your practice chooses to use color-coded visit types, the Visit Reason drop-down field in the Schedule Appointment panel will include color swatches next to each reason that is part of a designated visit type.

This will help schedulers to find a time slot on the appointment grid that matches the color of the visit type they are scheduling.

Your practice can include color blocks on your scheduling templates to give guidance to schedulers about where to place certain types of visits. In addition, visit bubbles display a stripe down the left to show the visit reason color of the actual visit, whether it matches the guidance in the background or not.

Users will not be prevented from placing appointments of one visit type on a time slot reserved for a different visit type.

For details about using color coding to set up visit types and for help with assigning visit type guidance to scheduling templates, read the Appointment Book configuration article on learn.pcc.com.

Find Siblings When You Schedule

How often do parents ask to schedule siblings for back-to-back appointments? The Appointment Book makes it faster and easier to schedule multiple family members simultaneously, as it includes a sibling list for the most recently searched for patient.

The list will be indented beneath the patient’s name, and can include up to ten siblings, sorted by age – youngest to oldest.

Siblings are defined as patients who share either a home or billing account.

Workflow Tip: Using this feature combined with the Availability Finder can help streamline your family scheduling process. For example, if you are scheduling two siblings for a sick visit, and your sick visit time slot is 15 minutes, you can search for the next available 30-minute sick visit. When you find one that works for the family, change the appointment to 15 minutes, and schedule one sibling right after the other.

Smart Scheduling Features

Often when scheduling, parents don’t ask for a specific date, but will inquire what you have tomorrow, or in two weeks, or three months. You can use smart scheduling terminology when searching the calendar at your practice. Alternatively, you can use the calendar browsing feature to jump to future dates for visual scheduling.

Enter Dates and Times to Search for Appointments

The date and time search boxes offer a few different ways to search for appointments. You can enter a specific date, use the drop-down options, or enter shorthand text. For example, you could enter the first three letters of a month, the letter “T” for today, or “2 weeks”, and the date that corresponds with your search command will appear.


The calendar will use hashmarks and highlighting to focus the date and time selected in the search fields.

You can select from pre-configured drop-down options in both the date and time fields. For example, if you have a patient selected and choose the “next physical due” option, the date that they are due for a physical, as well as the age they will be on that date will populate the date field.

If you select “beginning of day” or “end of day” in the Time search field, you will be taken to the first or last time slot that the provider has hours that day.


Use the Availability Finder to Search by Visit Type

You can use the Availability Finder tool to find find the next open time slot for a specific Visit Type.

When you choose your visit reason, the Availability Finder will default to the Visit Type that matches the visit reason selected when scheduling.

Click on the right arrow to jump to the next open time slot for that visit type.

You can also click on the left arrow to go backward.

Use Calendar Search Window to Jump to Any Day

If you prefer a more visual approach to scheduling, you can use the calendar window to schedule. This will show you six months into the future, making it easy to find the day you need.


The calendar shows you the provider hours for the selected provider and location. Click on any day within the search window to jump to that day in the Appointment Book.

Multiple Schedulers Can Work Simultaneously

As you schedule in PCC EHR’s Appointment Book, you will be able to see other users who are setting up appointments at the same time.

If another scheduler has selected a time slot on the calendar, it will appear on your screen with an ellipsis and the name of the scheduler.


Only the specific amount of time needed for the length of the appointment will be held. For example, if a 5-minute visit is being scheduled within a 15-minute time slot, other schedulers will be able to use the remaining 10 minutes simultaneously.

If you hold a time slot, the Appointment Book will continue to hold it if you open the patient’s chart, visit another tab, or perform another action. As long as the time slot remains selected, the Appointment Book will hold the time for you.

If you want to free up the cell you are holding, or if you are in the Appointment Book but do not wish to hold a specific cell, you can click the “Clear” button.

If you have permission to force in appointments, you can override your co-worker’s hold on a time slot.

Dynamic Use of Available Time Prevents Over-Booking

The Appointment Book will automatically accomodate longer appointments and, if necessary, fill time into the next cell.


Appointments will only borrow from the next time slot if there is sufficient time available. It will never change the start time of other appointments.

See Overbooked Time Slots At-A-Glance

If there is no room to push longer appointments into the next cell, you will need to have “force” permission to overbook a cell.

Overbooked appointments will stack side-by-side or one on top of the other. When a timeslot is overbooked or double-booked, you’ll see a patterned background indicating that the time is overstuffed.

You can use this visual indicator to quickly understand all the places where the day will be extra busy.

See Patient and Account Alerts As You Schedule

PCC’s Appointment Book can alert you to any important patient or account statuses, right after you select the patient to schedule. Your front desk staff will know immediately whether to schedule the patient, or if something else needs to happen first.

When you find a patient in the Appointment Book who meets the criteria for a scheduling alert, the alert will appear over the scheduling screen as soon as you select that patient.

You can click “Continue” to ignore the alert and schedule the appointment.

Prevent Scheduling Using Patient and Account Flags

Prevent patients and accounts from being scheduled by assigning patient or account flags. In PCC EHR’s Practice Preferences window select which flags should prevent scheduling by under the option “Prevent scheduling for patients with any of these flags”.

Check the Prevent scheduling checkbox, and select one or more flags in the Account Flags and Patient Flags drop-down menus below. Any patient or account with one of those flags cannot be scheduled in the future.

Flags that prevent scheduling are highlighted red in PCC EHR’s patient and account demographics components.

When you attempt to schedule a patient with any of your selected schedule-preventing patient or account flags, you will be unable to proceed with scheduling. Red text indicates that flags are preventing scheduling, and which flags are responsible.

When you schedule multiple appointments, any patients with a schedule-preventing flag will also be indicated with red text.

Any patients with the selected flags cannot be scheduled. Patients with appointments scheduled before adding a flag will remain on the schedule, but cannot be re-scheduled. Users with permission to force appointments cannot schedule patients with schedule-preventing flags.

Remove or Cancel an Appointment

When you need to cancel an appointment, select it within the calendar grid and click “Remove”.


Select a reason that the appointment is being canceled and click “Remove”.

Reschedule an Appointment

When you need to change the date and/or time of an appointment, select it within the calendar grid and click “Reschedule”.

The appointment will move to the “Reschedule Appointment” tab.


Select a new appointment time and click “Save” to continue.

Edit Appointment Details

Sometimes you need to edit appointment details without changing the appointment time. For example, a well visit might turn into a sick visit, or the length of an appointment could need to be extended.

You can make changes to the details of an appointment that has already been scheduled in the Appointment Book, without having to reschedule it.

Click “Edit” to change the visit reason, duration, and/or the appointment note.


Make changes in the Edit Appointment window and click “Save” to continue.

Place a Scheduling Block

Click the Add Block tab to work with scheduling blocks. You can create a block just as you would schedule a patient.

First, enter a title in the Block Reason field or select a previously used reason from the drop-down, and then select the length of time for the block.

Select the area of the calendar to block out and click “Save”.


What About Changes to the Doctor's Schedule?: You can block time anywhere on the schedule for a single day. To change a provider’s schedule for a day or manage their available time, use the Provider Hours configuration tool.

Review Appointment History

The Appointment History component displays all of a patient’s appointments and includes tools for making changes.

Your practice can add the Appointment History component to your Medical Summary, as well as chart and phone note protocols.

You can review a patient’s past appointments while charting, and can click to reschedule or remove upcoming appointments.

For example, you may have taken a call and opened a new phone note indicating the patient needs to reschedule. While recording the phone note, you can select the appointment on the Appointment History component and click “Reschedule”. PCC EHR will open the Appointment Book to the scheduled time. You can work with the family to choose a new time and/or clinician for the appointment.

Un-Cancel a Canceled Appointment

You can use the Appointment History component to reverse appointment cancelation.

Highlight the canceled appointment and click the new “Restore” button.

The “Restore” button replaces the “Remove” button when a canceled appointment is selected.

The Details option in the component will show that the appointment was removed and restored.

Find a Patient in pocketPCC

/in /by

To view a patient’s chart in pocketPCC, you can either go through the Schedule, or use the Find Patient button.

View a Patient’s Chart From the Schedule

You can open any patient’s chart by selecting their name from your schedule.


Find Patient Button

If you need to review a chart for a patient who is not listed on the schedule, you can use the Find Patient button.

When you click on the “Find Patient” button, a “Recent Patients” list will appear beneath the search box.


Your last 10 patients listed will include the most recent patients whose charts you opened, regardless of which PCC application you used.

Each patient is identified by name, current age and sex.

If the patient you are looking for is not listed, enter search text and press Enter or Go on your device to search.

 

Results include each patient’s name, birth date, age, PCP, and flags. Click on the patient to open their chart.


After you find a patient, you can review their Medical Summary, Demographics, Immunization History, Visit History and Documents. You can also add a new phone note or send a portal message.

Open and Use the Practice Management (Partner) Window

/in /by

Use the Practice Management window in PCC EHR to access various under-the-hood billing features and services in PCC’s Partner practice management suite.

Learn All Steps for the Biller Role: This article (and video) is part of the New User Training for Billers. You can use that outline to learn how to complete other billing tasks in PCC EHR.

How to Open a Practice Management Window

After permission is granted to a user role in the User Administration tool (see below), your PCC EHR users can use the Practice Management icon to open the Practice Management window.



Open Practice Management Window Automatically When You Log In

If you want your Practice Management window to open immediately when you log into PCC EHR, you can select the “Launch Practice Management each time I sign in” option in the My Account tool.


Use Multiple, Persistent Practice Management Sessions

You can use the plus (+) button to create multiple sessions. Each session will remember your work as long as you keep the Practice Management window open.


Your practice can use the Practice Management sessions to run reports while also performing important billing functions.

Access Permissions for the Practice Management Window

In order to access the Practice Management window feature, a user must have a Role with the “Practice Management” permission. You can set up and adjust your roles and assign them to users in the User Administration tool.

The system includes a second layer of user account security, which is controlled from your PCC Server. In most situations, permissions are synced between PCC EHR and Partner.

However, if for some reason the user’s PCC EHR login username and password do not match the server login information, PCC EHR will ask them to enter a username and password.

After a user enters it once, PCC EHR will remember this association and use it for future sessions.

Customize the Font Size and Color of Your Practice Management Window

When you are tracking down a billing issue for an account, you want your screen to be as clear and easy to read as possible. You can select your own preferred font size, font color, background color, and cursor color.

When you want to adjust your Practice Management window’s appearance, open the My Account tool.


You can choose a Small, Medium, or Large font. You can select a preset color option (white on black or black on white), and you can override those presets with your own preferred Background Color, Text Color, and Cursor Color.


As you make adjustments, a preview panel on the right will show you the final result. By using these tools, you can customize the Practice Management window’s appearance so it will be readable and easier on your eyes.

Customize Practice Management Window For Your Staff: All the users at your practice can make the above changes themselves in the My Account tool. You can also make these changes for them in the User Administration tool.

Find Patients or Accounts in Practice Management Programs

Whether you are editing demographics or posting payments in the Practice Management window, most programs are run for a patient or an account (a family). When you start running a program, you will be asked to select a patient or family. The checkin and checkout (check out) programs offer lists of today’s patients, but other programs ask for a name. You can also search by chart number, phone number, birth date, or several other variables, but the name is the easiest.

Here is what finding a patient by name looks like in all Partner programs:

In the example above, the user entered “Flin” as the last name and Partner found members of the Flinstone and Flint families. The user could then press Enter to open the first record or enter the number next to the desired patient.

Find Patients by Birth Date: You can find patients by birth date instead of account. Enter the birth date into the First Name field in any program and press Enter.

There are lots of tools for finding patients and accounts. For example, you can automatically recall the last patient you worked with or find their siblings.

Function Keys in Practice Management Programs

When you run a Partner program in the Practice Management window, the eight buttons across the bottom correspond with with F1 through F8 on your keyboard. The power of each key changes from program to program, but they are always labeled on your screen to help you understand their purpose.

The F12 key always takes you back one step or quits the program you are running without saving any changes.

AAP Resources: Pediatric Coding Newsletter, Red Book, and More

/in /by

PCC offers our clients access to a number of resources from the AAP, including the Pediatric Coding Newsletter, Patient Education (including Schmitt, TIPP, and more), and the AAP Red Book.

PCC practices can access these resources can be found in two places: through a PCC Community to the AAP website and from within PCC EHR.

PCC EHR Also Includes Bright Futures Resources and Customization Options: In addition to the AAP resources listed below, PCC EHR includes optional Bright Futures chart note protocols and periodicity guidance. For more information, see Bright Futures in PCC.

AAP Pediatric Coding Newsletter


A monthly publication that provides practical and accurate answers to your most urgent pediatric coding questions. As a PCC client, you have access not to the current issue and the entire AAP Pediatric Coding Newsletter archive.

AAP Red Book Online


This is the online version of the AAP’s Red Book, a comprehensive reference on pediatric infectious diseases.

Pediatric Patient Education


The Pediatric Patient Education section of the AAP website contains a collection of handouts and information built specifically for pediatric patients and families, most available in Spanish as well as English. Handouts include Schmitt Pedatric Care Advice, TIPP, VIS, and more.

Access AAP publications through PCC EHR

Use the Patient Education tool in PCC EHR to access all three of these resources (and more).



For a complete guide on how to use Patient Education inside PCC EHR, read Find and Share Patient Education and Handouts.

Access AAP publications through PCC Community

You can access AAP resources by logging into PCC Community and following an authorization link to the AAP website.

First, visit the PCC Community website and log in. For information about registering for PCC Community, read, PCC Community: The Home of PCCTalk.

If the welcome message is hidden, click “Show Message”.


Next, click “Access the newsletter” to visit the AAP Pediatric Coding Newsletter. Because of your PCC Community login, you will have access to all the AAP resources described above.

You will see PCC’s logo on the site, indicating you are logged in through PCC. You can click to access the AAP Pediatric Coding Newsletter, the AAP Pediatric Redbook, and the AAP’s library of educational materials for patients.

Print the AAP Coding Newsletter: You can print out any issue of the AAP Coding Newsletter. First, log into PCC Community and use the instructions above to follow the link to the AAP’s website. Next, click on any story from the issue. Finally, click on the “PDF” link to download the entire issue to your computer. You can read the newsletter on your computer screen or print it.

HIPAA, Security Risk Assessments, and the Pediatric Practice

/in /by

What is HIPAA? What should a pediatric practice do to meet HIPAA regulations? What should be in a pediatric practice’s privacy policy? And what’s a Security Risk Assessment?

This article discusses the many issues around HIPAA, Security Risk Assessments (SRAs), and what a pediatric practice should do to protect patient privacy and be in compliance with HIPAA regulations. Read below to learn about Business Associate Agreements, audits, and other HIPAA concepts.

Along the way, you’ll see sample documents and tips from PCC to help your practice be HIPAA-perfect.

What is HIPAA?

HIPAA, or the Health Information Portability and Accountability Act, is a set of policies, procedures and guidelines that were passed into U.S. law in 1996.

HIPAA has many provisions, including rules around health insurance, medical savings accounts, and other aspects of healthcare. When most people talk about HIPAA, they are talking about the HIPAA Title II sections on privacy, rules around information transactions, and security.

HIPAA defines Private Health Information, or PHI, and establishes it as the property of the patient. HIPAA says that the patient owns their medical records, and any organization that handles their PHI is obligated to take certain steps to protect their privacy. The patient (or guardian) is the only one who can do anything they want with their health information (share it, use it, etc.), and physicians and organizations need permission.

What Does HIPAA Require of a Pediatric Medical Practice?

What specifically does a pediatric practice need to do in order to follow HIPAA guidelines?

HIPAA obligates a medical practice to do the following:

  • Assign the roles of HIPAA Security Officer and HIPAA Privacy Officer to someone at your practice
  • Keep a signed Business Associate Agreement (BAA) with all vendors or other individuals who may come in contact with your patients’ Private Health Information (PHI).
  • Create and maintain a HIPAA Privacy Policy for your practice.
  • Perform an initial Security Risk Assessment for your practice, during which you look at all potential risks to your patients’ Private Health Information (PHI), and establish policies for protecting it.
  • Create and maintain a HIPAA Security Policy for your practice, based on your Security Risk Assessment.
  • Perform annual Security Risk Assessments, during which you review and update your HIPAA Security Policy, as needed, and log that you have done an annual review.
  • Make a HIPAA Patient Privacy Policy available to patients and families, and have them sign a HIPAA agreement.
  • Follow and enforce your practice’s written policies at your practice, taking reasonable steps to protect patient PHI.

In the sections below, you can learn more about each of these topics.

Violations, Penalties and Fines?: What are the risks to your practice if you do not follow HIPAA guidelines? Up until 2006, the HIPAA laws did not include clear actionable guidelines, and there was no rigorous enforcement. Since 2006, however, there have been tens of thousands of investigations of HIPAA violations, such as misuse and improper disclosure of patient PHI. Private practices are the most frequent group to receive corrective action, and millions of dollars in fines have been levied. (source)

Documents, Policies, Paper!: As you read the above obligations, you may have noticed that a big part of it includes developing a set of HIPAA policy documents and making them available to the correct people. The list of common HIPAA policy documents includes: Business Associate Agreement, HIPAA Privacy Policy, HIPAA Security Policy, and your HIPAA Patient Privacy Policy. Read below to learn more.

Assign Your Practice’s HIPAA Security Officer and HIPAA Privacy Officer

Who is in charge of HIPAA stuff at your practice? Who will handle the forms and policies, and who will help employees deal with PHI?

Your practice should assign the role of a HIPAA Security Officer and a HIPAA Privacy Officer to one or two people at your practice. These roles could be filled by your office manager, a managing provider, a human resources manager, or some other individual who has a head for policies and regulations.

Your HIPAA Security Officer will be the expert on your practice’s HIPAA policies. They will create and maintain the policy documents described below, implement those policies and make sure that your practice follows them, and they will be the person who everyone goes to if there is a breach in patient privacy. They will also oversee the annual renewal of the security risk assessment.

The HIPAA Privacy Officer is a more people-focused role. The privacy officer trains your staff and also assesses requests for PHI. They might take action or make changes around the office in order to protect patient privacy.

Sample Job Descriptions for HIPAA Security and Privacy Officer: You can find sample job descriptions online, from various third parties. You can also network with your fellow pediatricians on PCC Talk to find out how they fill these important roles.

Document Your Officers: Your HIPAA Security Policy, described below, should list who fulfills these two HIPAA roles at your practice. (164.308(a)(2), “identify security official”)

Business Associate Agreements (BAAs)

Your practice should maintain signed Business Associate Agreements with any vendor or third-party who might come in contact with your patients’ PHI. Keep a copy of these signed agreements. A Business Associate Agreement describes the limits and safeguards on how an entity has access to your patient’s PHI, and how they are/are not allowed to use it.

For example, you need to have a signed BAA with PCC. Patient PHI leaves your practice and passes through PCC’s servers when you submit insurance claims electronically. When you became a PCC client, we sent you a BAA which describes you, the “covered entity” and PCC, the “business associate”. Alternatively, your practice may have developed your own BAA and sent it to PCC to sign instead. PCC, in turn, has BAAs with clearinghouses and other entities that may receive patient PHI from us.


(Download BAA Template)
(More BAA information and samples at HHS.gov)

If your practice wishes to develop or update your BAA for use with third-parties, the HHS.gov website provides an excellent introduction to BAAs as well as sample BAA language that you can edit and adapt for your purposes.

You can also review your BAA with PCC as an example. A BAA is not a document that needs a great deal of customization for the average pediatric practice.

Do I Need a BAA With a Lab, My IT Professional, My Cleaning Service, etc.?: You might not need a BAA with every third-party or vendor with whom you do business. For example, if you fill out lab requisition forms and then give them to the patient, but you never actually send or distribute any form of PHI to a lab, you do not need a BAA with them. However, if your practice sends PHI directly to a vendor, you do need a BAA with that vendor. You need a BAA with any person or organization who might come into contact with patient PHI. For example, if an IT professional enters your premises to work on a computer that contains PHI, you should have a signed BAA with that IT professional or organization. If your cleaning service could potentially access paper charts in your practice, you should have a BAA with them. You do not need a BAA with your postal carrier or your internet service provider.

Security Risk Assessments

HIPAA obligates your practice to perform an initial Security Risk Assessment, as well as annual Security Risk Assessment updates. You will use the results of your Security Risk Assessment to create and periodically update your practice’s HIPAA Security Policy.

What do you need to do for your practice’s initial Security Risk Assessment? First, identify all potential security risks to PHI in your office. For example, you could start at your front door, walk around as if you are a patient or visiting professional, and identify every situation where a patient’s information may be revealed.

As you evaluate your office’s physical space, you should inventory your laptops, your procedures for closing the office, and carefully consider the different individuals and organizations that visit your practice and may come in contact with patient PHI. On the virtual side, you should consider all the technological ways that a patient’s PHI might be at risk.

Other Resources:

Initial SRA, Annual Reassessment, and Audits: After you perform an initial SRA, you should perform annual re-assessments, where you evaluate whether your existing policies are successful at mitigating risks to PHI, and to update your HIPAA Security Policy to reflect any changes. If a state agency performs an audit of your practice, they may ask to see your record of performing annual SRAs and what updates were made as a result of each annual SRA.

What do SRAs Have to Do With CMS and Meaningful Use?: One of the Meaningful Use measures used for the EHR Medicaid Incentive Program and PCMH requires that your office do annual SRAs. You should be doing them anyway, as part of your HIPAA compliance, but it’s notable that SRAs are part of CMS Meaningful Use guidelines as well.

HIPAA Security Policy

As you perform your initial Security Risk Assessment, your office will develop a written HIPAA Security Policy. As you identify risks, you will document what your office does to mitigate each risk. The finished document is your HIPAA Security Policy, and you should review it and update it each year when you perform your subsequent Security Risk Assessments.

Every office has different security needs, so PCC recommends you do not use a HIPAA Security Policy template or sample as a starting point.

Here are some examples of things your HIPAA Security Policy could cover:

  • Who is your practice’s HIPAA Security Officer?
  • How do you secure patient PHI technologically?
  • Where do you keep your laptops each night?
  • What do you do to ensure computer workstation security?
  • How do you keep paper charts secure?
  • How do you backup your PCC system? Are your backups encrypted?
  • What do you do to mitigate each of the specific risks that you identified in your SRA?
  • When do you perform your annual SRA?

For the official list of all the things your HIPAA Security Policy should say, the HHS provides a list of the HIPAA standards and what topics should be covered. PCC reviewed those guidelines and has additional information available. By walking through the standards and including each row, you can create a HIPAA Security Policy that will reflect the security policies of your practice and meet HIPAA guidelines.

PCC can not provide sample HIPAA Security Policies because the policy needs to be based on what your office does, and what your risks are, as discovered by performing a Security Risk Assessment. Do you have 2 employees, or 110? Are you in a high-crime area, or a small town? When you evaluate your security needs, your answers will be very different. The list of standards you must meet can be published in a table, but how your practice will meet those standards is particular to your practice.

Required Elements, Addressable Elements: As you review the HHS requirements, you will notice that some elements of a HIPAA Security Policy are classified as “Required” and some are classified as “Addressable”. A required element is a specific, required standard for security. It states precisely what your HIPAA Security Policy should say, and includes the guidelines that your practice should follow. An addressable element, on the other hand, is an issue that your office must have a policy about, though your practice’s specific policy is up to you. Your HIPAA Security Policy should include a reference to both Required and Addressable Elements, but the Addressable Elements will be customized based on your practice. For example, your HIPAA Security Policy should include your practice’s guidelines for when you terminate an employee, but there are no official guidelines for what those steps should be. As a “Required” example, your Security Policy should state that your practice will have a BAA with vendors.

Hire a Consultant?: Your practice may choose to hire a third-party consultant to help you perform your SRA and develop your HIPAA Security Policy. For example, PCC has worked successfully with Paul Vanchiere from the Pediatric Management Institute. PCC recommends caution when working with consultants, vendors, or state-sponsored organizations that may have divided motivations or may have a vested interest in selling you additional services or products. If your practice has a lawyer on retention, they can also provide consultation on HIPAA laws and regulations.

HIPAA Staff Privacy Policy Document

In addition to your HIPAA Security Policy, your practice needs a HIPAA Staff Privacy Policy.

The good news is that your HIPAA Staff Privacy Policy is much shorter than your Security Policy. It concisely describes when and how your staff can disclose PHI.

Your Privacy Policy should include:

  • The name of your HIPAA Privacy Officer
  • A list of reasons for when your practice would disclose PHI, such as upon receiving a court order, witnessing evidence of abuse, etc. Your policy should list all situations where your practice would disclose information without the patient or family’s consent.
  • A description of how the practice disposes of any PHI they receive. For example, when a paper lab result arrives at the practice, what happens to it?
  • Additional details that will help your staff perform the requirements of your HIPAA security policy, such as instructions for handling emailed PHI.

PCC created a downloadable list of items to include on your HIPAA Staff Privacy Policy: PCC’s Privacy Policy Recommendations. You can also read about all the standards at HHS.gov’s HIPAA Privacy Policy Summary page.

HIPAA Notice of Privacy Practices

Every patient, or patient guardian, must sign a HIPAA consent form when they first visit your practice.

If your practice is currently doing business, you are probably already doing this. If you’d like help writing or updating your HIPAA Notice of Privacy Practices or HIPAA consent form, we recommend reviewing this Department of Health and Human Services website, and working with your PCC colleagues.

The Office for Civil Rights issued a final rule on April 26, 2024 titled: HIPAA Privacy (New) Final Rule to Support Reproductive Health Care Privacy. The final rule requires covered health care providers, health plans, and health care clearinghouses to revise their Notice of Privacy Practices (NPP) in support of reproductive health care privacy. The deadline to update NPPs is February 16, 2026.

The Final rule NPP language and requirements begins here on the Federal Register: https://www.federalregister.gov/d/2024-08503/p-1046. We recommend you read this section of the Final Rule in full to determine the updates appropriate for your practice. We also encourage you to read the HIPAA Privacy Rule Final Rule to Support Reproductive Health Care Privacy: Fact Sheet HHS.gov, which provides a thorough overview of the final rule.

HIPAA Training At Your Office

You should train all employees on HIPAA privacy guidelines and your practice’s HIPAA policies.

For example, a HIPAA training should include:

  • A definition of HIPAA
  • What information is protected under HIPAA
  • The “Minimum Necessary” HIPAA rule: if PHI must be disclosed in the course of your practice’s normal business, you only disclose the minimum amount of PHI necessary to resolve the problem
  • The proper destruction of PHI that enters the office
  • The types of PHI disclosure and the penalties for disclosing PHI
  • What steps to follow if PHI is breached
  • Review of the practice’s privacy and security policies
  • Identify the practice’s HIPAA Security and Privacy officer(s)

You might schedule a class to teach a bunch of employees, or the HIPAA Privacy Officer might sit down and teach each new employee. You should make all employees aware of your Security and Privacy policies, and the employee should sign a HIPAA training form stating they have completed training and understand what is expected of them.

Document that Training Occurred: HIPAA requires that you document that the training has been provided (164.316). Along with any other kind of HIPAA activity, your practice should record when and who was trained and by whom. “if an action, activity, or assessment is required, maintain a written (which may be electronic) record of the action, activity, or assessment.” Record the training content, the date, and each attendee’s name along with any other materials or communication about the training.

Log Visitors and Repairs to the Office

If there is a breach of patient privacy on a particular day, you may need to create a list of all folks who entered your practice or could have had access to PHI.

In order to meet HIPAA requirements, your practice should keep a log of anyone who visits your office, along with the date and time and purpose of their visit. If they repair a laptop or other equipment, for example, you should record which laptop they repaired.

Network and Technology Audits and Scan Logs

If anyone sends you a report of a scan having to do with your technology, keep it. In case of an audit or security breach, the log or security scan will help identify problems or prove your office was making every effort to ensure patient security.

PCC provides your practice with a periodic Network Vulnerability Scan. PCC does not operate or maintain all aspects of your technology infrastructure, however. You may receive similar reports if you work with a different IT vendor.

Paper Charts, vs. Electronic Charts, and HIPAA

Sometimes a medical practice feels they do not need to perform Security Risk Assessments, or perform some other aspect of HIPAA preparation, because they use paper charts, because of their office configuration, or some other reason.

These assumptions are false. If your practice comes in contact with patient information of any kind, including demographic data, then you need to take HIPAA seriously and maintain the policies and guidelines described above.

Private Health Information, whether electronic (“ePHI”) or physical, is protected by HIPAA rules, and it includes any diagnoses or information used for billing, as well as patient names and birthdates.

Regardless of whether or not a medical practice uses an EHR, they need to go through the same steps, perform Security Risk Assessments, develop Security and Privacy Policies, inform patients of their HIPAA privacy policy, and maintain BAAs.

When You Get Audited, or Asked for Your Security Risk Assessment Records

If a state-sanctioned or other entity audits your practice, they may ask for a record of your security risk assessments or other evidence that you comply with HIPAA.

Here is a list of things your HIPAA Security Officer should keep on hand in case of an audit:

  • Business Associate Agreements (BAAs) with all business associates
  • Privacy and Security policies for your practice
  • HIPPA Patient Privacy Policy
  • Signed HIPAA training forms for all staff
  • Log of visitors/repairs in the office
  • Network/Technology Audit Logs
  • Security Risk Assessment Record

For more information about any of the items on this list, read the sections above.

Will You Ever Get Audited?: There is a budget out there for doing audits nationally. Hospitals get audited more often, but some PCC practices have had a HIPAA-related audit by a state agency, or an agency representing the Health and Human Services (HHS) office.

The AAP's Guide to Audits: If you’d like to learn more about the audit process, the AAP published an article called What to Do When an Auditor Knocks On Your Practice’s Door in 2013.

Conclusion: What NOT to Do for HIPAA

The HIPAA rules are intended to protect patient privacy. They are not intended to prevent you from providing care to patients, or to prevent you from doing business.

Here are some other important “don’ts” for HIPAA: Don’t get scared. Don’t trust anyone who recommends massive office remodeling in order to meet HIPAA requirements. Don’t let an outside commercial entity provide you a “free” security audit or analysis. Don’t think you need to spend thousands of dollars or hire a consultant if you don’t want to.

Every medical practice needs to have a series of policies in place and train their staff to protect PHI, but they do not need to take extreme or expensive measures.

If you have questions or concerns about HIPAA compliance at your practice, PCC encourages you to contact us. We’d be happy to help.

Read the Pulse: PCC’s Newsfeed

/in /by


The Pulse is a source of news and information for PCC clients. We use The Pulse to share information about our upcoming software releases, trainings, conferences, events and web labs, as well as pediatric news and industry information. We also announce PCC office closings and holidays.

Who Should Read the Pulse?

Any clinician, office manager, or pediatric staff member who wants to stay abreast of changes to their PCC system or software, learn about new releases or features, or find out about PCC events and other educational opportunities.

How Do I Read the Pulse?

To read the Pulse, click the “News” button in the lower-right corner of your PCC EHR window.

Show news button. Note that it is blue when you have unread news.
Show the news window

Articles appear with a list of headlines on the left-hand side of the window. Important and time-sensitive items will stick to the top of the news feed.

Vital Communication Tool: At least 1-2 people from your office should review The Pulse daily, as this is the main channel of communication PCC uses to share information about our software, products, and services. In the event of a service interruption or software problem, PCC will send an emergency message to everyone who receives The Pulse.

Can I Read the Pulse Online Instead?

You can also read the Pulse online here: PCC Pulse: Your Source For All Things PCC.

Contact PCC Support for password information.

You can also read updates on PCC Community, an online web forum.

Can PCC Email Me Updates and Important News Instead?

PCC sends periodic updates to a mailing list of our clients. Contact PCC Support to subscribe.

Newsletter Archives

If you missed a news item, have a question, or would like to check a past issue of the Pulse, contact PCC Support. We’ll help you find all the PCC news or information you’re looking for.

Acronyms and Industry Terms for the PCC Community

/in /by

This article defines acronyms and terms of interest to pediatric practices and the PCC community. PCC has created this for the use of our clients, for our own internal use, and for searching purposes. If you have an acronym or term you’d like added to this glossary, send it to support@pcc.com.

21st Century Cures Act

The 21st Century Cures Act is a United States law enacted by the 114th United States Congress in December 2016. Among health care providers, it is known for spelling out additional regulations prohibiting Information Blocking.

AAP

The American Academy of Pediatrics is an American professional association of pediatricians.

ACA

The Affordable Care Act, also known as Obamacare, is a United States federal statute that in addition to expanding healthcare coverage, includes several laws and initiatives that affect pediatrics. For example, the new ACA standards for categorizing CARC codes means that pediatric billers will see a plain-English “business scenario” on ERAs from payers.

ARRA

American Recovery and Reinvestment Act of 2009. Pediatric practices often refer to ARRA when they mean the EHR Medicaid and Medicare Incentive Program, which was established by ARRA.

batch

An internal PCC term. A batch represents an under-the-hood custom claim configuration on your PCC system. All the claims in a batch use the same claim configuration, so a batch might be named for a large group of payers. If your practice has an unusual claim configuration need, PCC’s EDI configuration specialists sometimes create a custom batch. Your list of batches may also reflect claim clearinghouses or other entities.

C-CDA

Also sometimes referred to as “CCDA” and “CCD”, the Consolidated Clinical Document Architecture is a standardized format for transmitting health information, popularized by Meaningful Use requirements.

PCC and other vendors use C-CDA-formatted files to transmit medical information. You can create a C-CDA for a patient record using the Summary of Care Record Report or for a single visit using the Patient Visit Summary. Patients and families can export a C-CDA from MyKidsChart. PCC even includes a C-CDA Batch Export Tool.

CMS

Centers for Medicare and Medicaid Services

CPT

Current Procedural Terminology. A CPT code is one of over 7,000 5-digit codes that describe procedures and services performed by health care providers. CPT is the primary procedure code set used to communicate with payers for billing purposes. CPT is maintained by the American Medical Association.

ECS

Electronic Claim Submission. When a PCC system sends billing information to a payer and then receives acknowledgement and responses. See EDI.

EDI

Electronic Data Interchange. For the PCC community, EDI refers to all manner of electronic communication between a medical practice and third parties. For example: electronic claim submission (ECS), automated insurance eligibility checking, immunization registry submissions, and electronic personal billing.

EEF

Electronic Encounter Form. After charting a visit in PCC EHR, a user clicks the “Bill” button to review the procedure and diagnoses and send the visit to billing. The first screen they see in the Bill window displays charted and optional procedure and diagnoses, and is called the “Electronic Encounter Form” or EEF because it mimics the purposes of a paper encounter form, or “superbill”.

EHR

Electronic Health Record. EHR, also sometimes called EMR for Electronic Medical Record, usually refers to the software and services that support a medical institution’s tracking of patient electronic health records. PCC EHR is the name of the suite of electronic health record software and services developed and supported by PCC.

fame

In PCC’s first software suite, Partner, the family account editor was called fame. The name is an acronym for Family Editor. In PCC EHR, users edit family and account information in components in the patients chart or in tools like Patient Checkin.

FDB

First Data Bank is the vendor who supplies electronic prescribing and medication management features to PCC EHR. When you click on “PCC eRx” in a patient’s chart, you use a product designed by a cooperative agreement between PCC and FDB.

GPCI

Geographic Practice Cost Index. A series of coefficients used to adjust the RVUs of a CPT based on a practice’s location (generally state-level).

HCFA

Health Care Financing Administration, established in 1977. HCFA (pronounced “HIC-fuh”) may also refer to the HCFA 1500 form, a standardized claim form required by insurance companies for claim submissions.

HIPAA

The Health Information Portability and Accountability Act is a set of policies, procedures and guidelines that were passed into law in 1996.

HIPAA has provisions for maintaining your health insurance when you switch employers, it created guidelines around medical savings accounts, and effected other aspects of healthcare.

When most people talk about HIPAA, however, they are talking about the Title II sections on privacy, rules around information transactions, and security

For more information, read HIPAA, Security Risk Assessments, and the Pediatric Practice.

HL7

Health Level Seven is an international set of data format standards for the use of exchanging health information.

ICD-10

International Classification of Diseases, 10th Revision. ICD-10 is a code set published by the World Health Organization that is used by doctors and clinicians to classify diseases and health problems. ICD-10 is the required code set for diagnosis reporting for billing purposes, replacing ICD-9 on October 1st, 2015.

LOINC

Logical Observation Identifiers Names and Codes. LOINC is a database and universal standard for identifying medical laboratory observations. PCC uses LOINC codes to indicate the discrete tests used inside Lab Orders, as well as for reporting purposes.

MU

Meaningful Use is a set of standards, best known for its incorporation into the EHR Medicaid Incentive programs that are part of ARRA, which aims to:

  • Improve quality, safety, efficiency, and reduce health disparities
  • Engage patients and family
  • Improve care coordination, and population and public health
  • Maintain privacy and security of patient health information

For more information, visit HealthIt.gov’s Definitions Page for Meaningful Use.

NCQA

The National Committee for Quality Assurance is a licensing body that oversees and adjudicates a PCMH certification process. The Meaningful Use program (EHR Medicaid Incentive Program) includes some of the NCQA’s Clinical Quality measures.

notjane

In PCC’s first software suite, Partner, the patient account editor was called notjane. The name is a tongue-in-cheek acronym for Not Just Another Editor. In PCC EHR, users edit patient and account information in components in the patient’s chart or in tools like Patient Checkin.

ODF

On-Demand Formulary, shortened to ODF, an on-demand, plan-level formulary lookup service provided by Surescripts. This service is integrated into PCC eRx and runs automatically when you create a prescription.

PCC

PCC stands for Physician’s Computer Company, a pediatric-focused software and services company located in Winooski, VT. PCC develops an award winning, best-of-class pediatric EHR, the most powerful billing and practice management system available, and offers unlimited, 365-day support as well as free consultation and resources for any challenge facing a pediatric practice.

PCMH

Patient Centered Medical Home.

PCMH encompasses a philosophy of patient care as well as a set of standards. It is an approach to care where “practices seek to improve the quality, effectiveness, and efficiency of the care they deliver while responding to each patient’s unique needs and preferences.” (AAFP.org)

Various state and local organizations, insurance carriers, and other governing bodies have adopted the PCMH standard and created paid incentive programs for practices that implement these principles.

PHI

Protected Health Information is a term often used for all of a patient’s private medical records. More specifically, as defined by HIPAA, PHI means any information about health status, provision of health care, or payment for health care that is created or collected by a “Covered Entity” (or a Business Associate of a Covered Entity), and can be linked to a specific individual.

pip

In PCC’s first software suite, Partner, the tool for posting insurance payments was called pip. The name is an acronym for Post Insurance Payments.

RBRVU

Resource-Based Relative Value Unit, shortened to RVU.

RTPB

Real-Time Prescription Benefit, shortened to RTPB, an on-demand, patient-specific formulary lookup service provided by Surescripts. This service is integrated into PCC eRx and runs automatically when you create a prescription.

RVU

Relative Value Unit, shorthand for RBRVU. Relative Value Units represent the “score” given to a CPT by CMS to determine the fee paid by Medicare. Used by payers to set fee schedules and more.

SAM

In PCC’s previous software suite, the scheduler was called SAM, which is an acronym for Scheduling Appointment Minder. In PCC EHR, users schedule appointments in the Appointment Book.

SRA

A Security Risk Assessment (SRA) is when a practice performs an assessment of security risks to patient PHI and creates or reviews policies for protecting that PHI. A pediatric practice performs an initial SRA when first implementing their HIPAA policies. They should also perform an annual SRA to review their policies and make adjustments. For more information, read HIPAA, Security Risk Assessments, and the Pediatric Practice.

Surescripts

The vendor who provides secure electronic information exchange services for e-prescribing.

TST

Technical Solutions Team. At PCC, the TST are those PCC Support members who are experts in technical subjects such as computer networking, hardware, operating systems, and related needs.

Make Documents Available to Patients and Families in My Kid’s Chart

/in /by

You can make documents available to patients and families in My Kid’s Chart, PCC’s patient portal. You can use this feature to share forms, test results, and other important documents with your patients and families.

When importing or editing a document, you have the option to share or remove a document from the patient portal.



 

 

When the patient or guardian logs into My Kid’s Chart, a green dot and “Unread Document”, or “Unread Documents” appear on the Patient Portal’s home page, below the patient’s name.

 

In each patient’s chart, the portal displays the five most recent documents by default. To view more, the patient can click the “More” button at the bottom of the document list.

Documents appear in reverse chronological order, and if a document doesn’t have a title the word “Document” will appear instead. The user can click on a document to download and view it.

Turn It Off?: If your practice does not want to share documents through the patient portal, you can turn this feature off in the Patient Portal Manager in the Tools menu.

 

Vaccine Lot Report

/in /by

You can run the Vaccine Lot report in PCC EHR to identify all patients who received a particular vaccine lot within a date range.

To run the report, go to the Reports menu, and click on Vaccine Lot Report.


You can run this report on a number of criteria, specifying date of administration, as well as Vaccine lot number or diluent lot number. You can also specify lot location, if you are a multi-location practice.

The report returns a table, sortable on any column by clicking the column title. This report can be printed directly, or saved as a *.csv file, and it includes the contact information for patients. If your practice is performing a vaccine recall, you can use this information to contact patient families.

Contact Information: The contact information in this table is pulled from the Patient’s Confidential Communication Preference from the Demographics section of the patient’s chart. If the patient does not have a contact preference, these columns will display the mailing address and phone number of the patient’s custodial account.

The PCC EHR Audit Log

/in /by

Use the PCC EHR Audit Log to review details about system events pertaining to a patient’s chart. You might use the PCC EHR Audit Log when you need to:

  • Review a complete record of who accessed or made changes to a specific patient’s chart
  • Review all actions performed in PCC EHR by a particular user
  • Review a particular session or event where a user edited a patient’s chart or made a particular change

Run the PCC EHR Audit Log

To view the log, select “PCC EHR Audit Log” from the Reports menu.


Before you generate the report, you can add filters to limit the output to a date range, a specific patient, one or more users, or one or more kinds of chart events.

Use the onscreen tools to enter a date or select other criteria.


If you wished to see everything a specific user did in relation to a specific patient’s chart, you could enter multiple criteria.

After choosing your criteria, click “Generate” to create the log and see the results.



On the results screen, you can see all chart events that met your chosen criteria.

Slow Performance, One User Only: The Chart Event Audit Log compiles thousands of records into an easy-to-read format. It takes considerable system resources, and can take several seconds to run. Only one user can open the Chart Event Audit Log at a time.

How to Read and Interpret the PCC EHR Audit Log

On the results screen, you can see the session ID, the date and time, the user, the patient, the event, and the source of the log entry.

If you hover your mouse cursor over any field, you can see more information.

The reference below explains how each column on the report works.

Session

You can see the unique session ID with a unique color in the first column. When a user logs in and logs out, that information becomes a unique session.

You can click on the session ID button to narrow the report down to a specific user’s session, or just those parts of a user’s session related to a single patient’s chart.

After narrowing the report results, you can click “Back” to return to the full results.

Date/Time

The Date/Time column displays the date and time that the event took place.

User

The User column displays the user who performed the Event on the Source. For example, a pediatrician “Fred Jones, M.D.” may have accessed or edited a section of a patient’s chart. The User column won’t always show a PCC EHR user. It may instead show programs and processes that access and modify a patient’s chart automatically, such as the Partner practice management system or the prescription system.

Patient

The Patient column displays the patient name on the chart that created the log entry.

Event

The Event column describes what occurred. Typically, this means an action taken by the user (or by the system process) in relation to some part of a patient’s chart. For example, a user may “Access” a section of the patient’s chart.

You can see a list of possible events by selecting the Event criteria from the report screen.


Source

The Source of the log entry is the chart section or other data element where the event occurred. Typically, this indicates the data that was affected by the Event column. For example, a user may have accessed the “Patient Chart”, or a specific visit chart note.

New Entry Types Over Time: As PCC expands its databases and software tools, new Events and Sources will be added to the items available in the log. If you wish to review chart access from pocketPCC, for example, or if you are unsure whether or not something is included in the PCC EHR Audit Log, contact PCC Support.

Permission to Run the PCC EHR Audit Log

Your practice can customize which users can access the PCC EHR Audit Log by adding or removing access for a user role in the User Administration tool.



Review Your PCMH Measures and Performance on a Dashboard

/in /by

The PCMH dashboard page contains all of the PCC Practice Vitals Dashboard measures that relate to NCQA’s 2017 PCMH standards. You can use this page to monitor your performance toward meeting specific elements and factors. You can also print this page to share the data with staff and providers and for submission to NCQA as part of your application for PCMH recognition.

To view your PCMH Dashboard page, log in to the Practice Vitals Dashboard and click the PCMH tab on the menu.


The dashboard is organized by PCMH elements and factors, making it straightforward to apply this data to PCMH recognition.

For more information, click on a measure to view a complete dashboard on just that measure.


Some of the factors on this page can be met by choosing measures listed in drop-down menus.



Printing: Some web browsers have trouble printing this page. If you cannot get it to print successfully, try right-clicking on the page and look for an option to “view frame” or “print frame”.

PCC Does Even More for PCMH: In addition to the reports in your Practice Vitals Dashboard, PCC’s software and services include many other features and reports that help you apply for PCMH. Read more about becoming a Patient Centered Medical Home.

C-CDA Batch Export Tool

/in /by

The C-CDA Batch Export tool can export Summary of Care C-CDA files for all patients who had a charted visit in PCC EHR within a specified date range.

When Would You Use This Tool?: PCC can provide your practice with a better data export than provided by the C-CDA Batch Export tool, and you can create a single C-CDA for a single patient with the Summary of Care Record report. However, your practice may need to use the C-CDA Batch Export tool to illustrate data portability in the event of an audit by your state’s executors of the ARRA EHR Medicaid Incentive Program.

What Is C-CDA, and What Is Included in This Export?: The C-CDA Batch Export tool creates a zipped file containing Summary of Care records in C-CDA format. These files match the Meaningful Use Stage 2 criteria for a transition of care, specified as 170.314(b) of the Consolidated-Clinical Document Architecture. For more information, contact PCC Support.

Open the C-CDA Batch Export Tool

To export a batch of C-CDA files, run the C-CDA Batch Export Tool from the the Tools menu.

Turn On the Tool: If you do not see the C-CDA Batch Export tool in your tools menu, you can add it to a user role in the User Administration tool.

Choose a Date Range

Next, enter a date range for patient appointments, and click “Export”. PCC EHR will collect the information and package it into a zip file of C-CDA formatted files.



It takes several seconds to produce each C-CDA, so running a large record set for many patients will take some time.

Choose a Save Location

Your computer will prompt you to save the zipped C-CDA files locally to your workstation.

PHI: The C-CDA files include private health information. When you create and save this export to your personal computer, you are taking responsibility for their safe distribution. Delete these files when you are finished.

Contact PCC Support Instead: The C-CDA Batch Export Tool should never be needed for data export. If you need to export large sets of patient data from PCC EHR, PCC can instead provide a complete data export.

Hardware Guide: Your Personal Computer and Equipment

/in /by

Your office will use computers, printers, scanners and other peripheral hardware to use PCC software and services.

PCC does not sell or maintain this equipment, but we can advise you on your purchases, and we will help you configure and set up your equipment to work with PCC software and your network.

Read the sections below to learn about recommended hardware and minimum requirements.

Contact PCC: No matter what new hardware you need to purchase, we encourage you to contact PCC’s Technical Solutions Team (1-800-722-1082, x2 or support@pcc.com) to discuss the model and sort out any installation issues. PCC has worked with hundreds of offices to design hardware solutions and our consultation is included in your PCC Care Plan.

Does PCC Provide Support For Your Personal Computer and Other Hardware?

  • PCC supports the hardware in your office as it relates to PCC services. For example, our support team can help you set up a new printer for Partner or PCC EHR printing, and we can help you configure your new laptop to connect to Partner and PCC EHR.
  • PCC can also make hardware and manufacturer recommendations that represent the “best bets” when considering cost and reliability.
  • PCC cannot guarantee support for every type and brand of equipment.
  • PCC does not provide support for your Windows or Macintosh workstations, including security and OS updates.

Computer Workstations

Your practice can use laptops or desktops to connect to PCC software. What are PCC’s minimum and recommended hardware requirements, and what else should you consider when you purchase a personal computer?

Recommended Workstation Specifications

The recommendations below are based on industry reviews and feedback from our clients’ experience at their practices. Many factors can influence real-world experience. PCC cannot guarantee the performance of specific hardware.

Workstation and operating system age do affect performance. We recommend that workstations have a manufacturer date that is no more than three years old. Investing in a high-quality CPU will improve the performance of PCC EHR. This is particularly important for clinicians who are regularly opening multiple charts and staff who require swift navigation for their workflow.

Windows PCs

Here are the minimum specifications we recommend for a PC workstation running Windows:

  • CPU: Modern Intel Core i5 Processor manufactured three years ago or fewer (avoid ARM processors)

  • Display Resolution: 1920 x 1080

  • RAM: 8GB

  • Storage: 128GB+ Hard Drive or Solid State Disk

  • Operating System: Windows 11 Pro

Display Resolution: Displays with a very high resolution (DPI) can cause an issue where some PCC application data may be cut off from the edges of your screen. PCC recommends purchasing laptops with a full high definition (FHD) display resolution (+/- 1920 x 1080). If you are unsure about a particular model, please contact PCC Support for guidance.

Recommended PC Models: Most current business-class personal computers from Dell, HP or Lenovo meet the specifications above and should perform well.

Operating System Details: For a Windows PC, PCC recommends the latest version of Windows Professional. See the Operating System Details below to learn more.

Apple Macintosh Computers

Here are the minimum specifications we recommend for an Apple Macintosh computer workstation:

  • CPU: Apple processor manufactured fewer than three years ago

  • RAM: 8GB

  • Storage: 256GB+ Hard Drive or Solid State Disk

  • Operating System: MacOS version 13 or later

Recommended Macintosh Models: Any current Macintosh model should perform well. iPads are not supported.

Laptops or Desktops?

If you use PCC EHR, you might prefer to purchase laptops that can be carried in and out of exam rooms. Or you may decide that installing a computer under a cupboard works well for you.

PCC clients report that laptops are more prone to theft and damage and often have battery problems. A desktop computer that can be permanently connected to your network over a Cat 5 cable will have fewer network problems than a wireless laptop. And it will be harder to steal or damage.

Laptops add convenience and mobility. You can carry a laptop into an exam room, set it up on an exam tray, transfer it to your office for charting later, and then take it home to continue your work.

If you purchase laptops, you may wish to invest in extra batteries or charging cables. If you purchase extra power adapters, you can plug in a laptop wherever you work, which will keep you from running out of power in the middle of a visit. Alternatively, you can select a laptop with exceptional battery life.

If you can plug your laptop directly into a network cable instead of relying on WiFi, that will improve connectivity. You might also consider anti-theft measures, such as locking cables or Apple’s Find My Mac service, which can locate your laptop remotely if it is stolen.

Can I Use a Tablet or Touchscreen Laptop?: PCC software is not designed for or tested on tablets or touchscreen laptops. Although PCC EHR sometimes works on such devices, PCC only provides software support for workstations that meet PCC’s minimum hardware requirements, which excludes tablets and touchscreen laptops. For an optimal PCC experience, please purchase computer workstations that explicitly meet the recommendations in this article, or contact PCC Support for additional help and guidance when making your purchase.

Dedicated For Practice Use

PCC strongly recommends that laptops and PCs intended for charting and practice management services be used only for those purposes.

If you have other computing needs, PCC recommends you use a different computer.

Operating System Details

PCC practices can use personal computers that run the Apple Macintosh OS or Microsoft Windows operating systems. PCC has worked extensively with each operating system and can share pros and cons of each.

Other Operating Systems: For questions about other operating systems, contact PCC Support at 1-800-722-1082 or support@pcc.com. PCC does not recommend operating systems that are no longer supported by the manufacturer.

Mobile Operating Systems: PCC’s mobile applications (pocketPCC and the patient portal) use your mobile device’s browser. They work with any modern mobile device running a standards-compliant browser.

To use PCC’s software and services, you can use desktop computers, laptops, or workstations that run the following operating systems.

Macintosh OS

You can connect to Partner and PCC EHR using an Apple Macintosh computer, such as an iMac or a Macbook Air. Macintoshes run on a virus-resistant, secure operating system based on Unix, just like your PCC server. PCC will help you connect your Macintosh to PCC software services, but PCC does not offer specific Macintosh support or training.

The Macintosh OS (or macOS) operating system is very crash resistant. Many PCC clients report that Macintosh laptops have better battery life than similar laptops from other manufacturers. The disadvantage of Macintosh computers is that they may cost more than some other options and some familiar software may not be available.

Any Macintosh computer running the current macOS is suitable for all Partner and PCC EHR functions. PCC recommends that Macintosh users update their computers to the most recent macOS version, as the updates are free and improve the security and reliability of the computer.

When Should I Update My System Software?: PCC recommends that Macintosh users regularly run the “Software Update” utility, found in the “About This Mac” option in the Apple menu, to ensure security on their machines. However, for major annual operating system releases, PCC recommends users wait a few months or until the first major patch before they update their workstations.

Microsoft Windows

You can connect to Partner and PCC EHR from a Windows PC, such as a Dell, HP, or unbranded computer, running a version of the Microsoft Windows operating system. PCC will help you connect your PC to PCC software services, but PCC does not offer specific Windows support or training.

Microsoft Windows is the most common operating system for computers sold by most vendors. Windows may contain security vulnerabilities that could endanger your office’s network, and there are more viruses for Windows than for other operating systems. Despite these drawbacks, Windows OS machines have the most available software, are the easiest to find, and are the most likely to have a range of local support vendors. Most PCC clients use Windows machines to connect to Partner and PCC EHR.

PCC recommends using the current Windows Professional Operating System.

When Should I Update My System Software?: When you use Windows PCs in your office, it is important to keep your virus protection software and Windows operating system up-to-date. For example, you can select the Windows Update application from the All Programs menu. For major operating system updates, PCC recommends you wait until a few months after the public release.

Do Not Purchase or Install Microsoft Windows Home or Basic Editions.: Windows Home and Basic Editions do not meet HIPAA compliance requirements.

Check For Out-of-Date Operating Systems

PCC EHR presents a warning message on the log in screen if you are using a computer with an operating system that is nearing the end of its support life cycle. When a major operating system vendor (Microsoft, Apple) stops providing security updates or other support for an operating system, PCC typically ends support for it as well.

The warning will appear in red and it will state that you need to update your operating system before the next PCC EHR release. If the operating system is not updated, then the EHR will cease to work with the next release.

Microsoft Windows Domains

It takes a lot of work to maintain all of the Windows PCs in a pediatric practice. Between viruses, software installations and updates, and managing user account permissions, it can feel like a full time job. Some PCC pediatric practices elect to set up and install a Windows Domain to manage all of their workstations from a central server.

With a Windows Domain, you can manage software installation and user account management from a central PC. That computer will push configuration settings to all the Windows PCs in your practice. Virus protection and software updates can all be done once, instead of once for every workstation at your practice. Additionally, you can keep your PCs clean of malware or undesirable applications. Windows users at your practice will be able to log into Windows on all devices, and you can lock them out easily when they leave your practice.

A Windows Domain can be expensive to implement, and it requires maintenance and upkeep by a consultant and/or a system administrator at your practice. PCC does not sell, install or directly support Windows products, but our technical solutions team is knowledgable about Windows Domains and can help you make a decision. Contact PCC Support for additional information.

Printers

What should you consider before purchasing a printer for your practice?

  • PCC’s software is designed to work with printers that support PCL natively.
  • PCC only supports networked printers, which can be wired or wireless.
  • PCC does not support printers that connect to a PC by a USB cable. Your practice may use these printers at your desk for various purposes, but PCC does not recommend them for bulk printing. PCC’s Partner software cannot send jobs directly to a USB-connected printer.
  • PCC recommends only laser printers. Inkjet printers are not recommended for office use because they are less reliable and more costly over time.
  • PCC software works with most HP LaserJet printers and multifunction devices. It works with many Brother, Kyocera, and Ricoh devices as well.
  • Canon and Epson devices are typically not compatible with PCC software.

PCC Recommends HP Printers: PCC recommends Hewlett-Packard LaserJet Business printers because they have consistently demonstrated compatibility and reliability. They also support advanced features (e.g. duplex printing and tray selection).

Contact PCC Before Purchasing: Please call PCC Support to verify that a specific device you are considering purchasing is compatible with PCC software.

Scanners

A scanner takes a paper chart, insurance card, form letter, lab result, or other piece of paper and sends it to PCC EHR, where a user can import it into a patient chart. Some scanners need to plug into a workstation computer with a USB cable, other scanners can connect to your network on their own.

PCC will work with your office to help you determine your scanner needs and select an appropriate scanner. PCC cannot guarantee PCC EHR compatibility with a scanner we have not tested and approved, so if you have concerns, send PCC the make and model number of a scanner for verification before purchasing.

What About Copiers and All-In One Devices?: All-in-one printer, scanner, fax devices, or your practice’s copier, may have the ability to scan to a network folder, but they will be slower than a dedicated scanner.

Can You Lease a Scanner?: As with copiers, some offices lease powerful scanners, particular during the paper-chart conversion process. Have your vendor contact PCC at 1-800-722-1082 to discuss needs.

Recommended Scanners

PCC has experience with and supports specific Brother ADS network scanner models. We have tested these models and have Technical Solutions Team experts at PCC who can help you with their setup and operation.

These scanners do not need to be plugged in to a computer workstation, which allows easier access for all users who need to scan. Rather than relying on workstation software, this device is set up through its menu or through a web interface, and it sends scan jobs over your practice’s network. You can configure and operate these scanners from either Microsoft Windows or Apple Macintosh workstations.

If your practice’s IT specialist sets up a copier or a different model of scanner than those listed above, PCC can provide your technician with the network path used to send documents to PCC EHR. We are unable to provide additional assistance for unsupported scanners.

PCC's Setup Guide: PCC created a step-by-step process for setting up a Brother scanner. This help article references an older scanner model, but the basic steps should be similar.

Barcode Scanners

Barcode scanners come in corded and bluetooth models. PCC currently recommends investing in a corded 2D barcode scanner. Corded scanners can easily be plugged into any workstation, do not require a battery, and are generally more affordable than bluetooth models. Bluetooth scanners are portable, but require charging and can only pair with one workstation.


PCC does not recommend a particular barcode scanner, but has found Zebra, Symbol, and REALINN to be fairly reliable brands. If you want PCC to vet your barcode scanner choice prior to purchase, send an email to PCC Support with the models you are considering.

Warranty and Repairs: If your scanner breaks, you will need to contact the manufacturer for any repair requests.

If you choose a cordless model, you will need to pair the scanner with your workstation. Read this guide to learn how to pair a bluetooth scanner with your computer workstation.

For more information on selecting an immunization barcode scanner, read Use a Barcode Scanner to Manage Immunization Inventory.

Vision Screeners

Depending on your practice’s network and hardware configuration, PCC may support vision screeners such as GoCheck Kids and Welch Allyn Spot Vision Screener. These screeners send results directly to PCC EHR’s Import Documents tool. However, some configurations may require that you purchase third-party software.

Label Printers

You can print lab specimen labels from PCC EHR. PCC has tested this functionality with DYMO 450 and 550 label printers and 30336 (2-1/8” x 1”) and 30252 (3-1/2″ x 1-1/8″) labels.

Other printers and label sizes may work.

Other Hardware and Software Needs

For information about other hardware and software needs, contact PCC Support.

Submit Immunization Records to Your Registry

/in /by

PCC EHR follows the CDC’s Meaningful Use HL7 implementation guidelines, allowing us to interface with most of the 56 immunization registries across the country. Historically, these registries have had their own set of immunization guidelines and implementation rules. However, state by state, they are now moving towards using a single national standard for immunization data.

Different registries may implement these guidelines in slightly different ways, but the instructions below are suitable for every registry. The CDC uses data from the registries to inform decisions on public health policy.

How to Get Started

Contact Your Immunization Registry and PCC

To begin this process, you will need to communicate with your immunization registry.

We Can Help: Contact PCC Support at 1-800-722-1082 or support@pcc.com. We can help you reach the appropriate registry and perform the setup and configuration steps below.

If in Texas, Make Sure All Users Who Will Administer Immunizations are Configured with an NPI

Practices in Texas must configure all users who will administer immunizations with an NPI. Immunizations administered by users who are not configured with an NPI will be rejected by the registry.

Open your Providers table in ted and add your practice’s type II (office) NPI number to the “NPI” field of any user who administers immunizations and does not have an NPI of their own.


If you have “Nurse,” “Flu,” or similar providers configured, these should also get the type II (office) NPI.

Review Your CVX and MVX Codes

CVX and MVX codes are part of the HL7 standard used by the CDC, and are required for submitting accurate immunization information. You must enter these codes in Partner before submitting your data.

Enable Immunization Registry Communication Preferences

For each patient, your practice must document immunization registry communication preferences. Immunization registry communication preferences accompany immunization submissions to your registry and indicate how the registry may contact a patient and, optionally, what they may do with that patient’s information. You can set patients’ immunization registry communication preferences in the Communication Preferences component.

If immunization registry communication preferences are not already visible in the Demographics section of the patient’s chart, you may need to turn on the Immunization Communication Preference fields.

First, open Component Builder inside the Protocol Configuration editor.


Next, edit the Communication Preferences component and adjust which preferences appear in the component.


In the event that your immunization registry requests that you include a patient status with your vaccine record submissions, you can enable the Patient Immunization Registry Status field within the Communication Preferences component.

This field will allow you to record a patient status for submission to your immunization registry in accordance with the registry’s guidelines.

If in Connecticut, Enable the Medicaid Number Field

The Connecticut state immunization registry, CTWiZ, requests that a Medicaid number be submitted with patient immunizations. You can add a field for Medicaid number to the patient demographics screen in PCC EHR.

Open the Configuration menu and select Protocols. Then, click the “Component Builder” button.


Select the Chart-Wide Components tab, then edit the Patient Demographics component.


In the Patient Alternate Identifiers section of the Edit window, select “Patient Medicaid number” from the drop-down list.

Save and close out of the Protocol Configuration tool. The field for patient Medicaid number now appears in the Alternate Identifiers section of the Patient Demographics screen in PCC EHR.

When you record a Medicaid number in the Alternate Identifiers section of a patient’s chart, it automatically gets sent to the Connecticut immunization registry with immunization submissions.

Use the Lot Manager

The HL7 standard requires lot number and expiration dates for all vaccine data.

Always use the Lot Manager in the Immunization Configuration tool to maintain up-to-date lot information. Lot numbers and expiration dates must be entered for all vaccine inventory.

Optional: Configure PCC to Automatically Add a Custodian as Personal Contact

The HL7 standard requires a Personal Contact for each patient. Your practice can add the Personal Contact in the Demographics component of a patient’s chart. You can optionally use the Practice Preferences to configure PCC to automatically add the custodian as a personal contact when a new patient record is created.


Optional: Add Demographics Components to Chart Notes

The HL7 standard requires that every patient record include an Immunization Communication Preference and a Personal Contact. Your practice can update that information during a visit on the Demographics screen in PCC EHR.

Optionally, you can use the Protocol Configuration Tool to add the Communication Preferences component and/or the Personal Contacts component to chart notes, particularly new patient chart notes.

Collecting The Right Data

At every encounter where immunizations are administered, your practice must collect the required information for the registry.

Read the steps below to learn how to collect all required immunization-related information for the HL7 standard.

Assign a Clinician to the Encounter

A clinician with an NPI must be assigned to every visit. If your practice schedules visits for “Nurse”, for example, then during the visit you should change the provider in the Appointment Details section of the chart note to a real clinician.

For Every Patient, Collect Race, Ethnicity, and State-Specific Identifiers

Review and update race and ethnicity information during each visit. You can enter it in the Demographics section of the patient’s chart.

As with other components in PCC EHR, your office could add the Patient Demographics section to any chart note ribbon.

In Connecticut, Record Patients’ Medicaid ID Number

The Connecticut state immunization registry, CTWiZ, requests that patients’ Medicaid number be included with immunization submissions. You can record a Medicaid number in the Alternate Identifiers section of the patient demographics screen in PCC EHR.

It is possible to have multiple alternate ID fields enabled on your PCC system. If the Alternate Identifiers section of the demographics screen contains a blank drop-down field followed by a blank text field, click into the drop-down and select “Patient Medicaid number,” then record the patient’s Medicaid number in the text field.


If you already see an ID in the Alternate Identifiers section of the demographics screen and it is not a Medicaid number, click the plus (+) symbol to add a new row, select “Patient Medicaid number” from the drop-down list, then record the patient’s Medicaid number in the text field.


When you record a Medicaid number in the Alternate Identifiers section of a patient’s chart, it automatically gets sent to the Connecticut immunization registry with immunization submissions.

Review Immunization Registry Communication Preferences

You must review and fill out the Immunization Communication Preference for each patient.

For each patient, permission to share immunization information with the registry must be set to either “Yes” or “No”.

The “Immunization Registry Communication Preferences” question appears in the Communication Preferences component, which appears by default in the Demographics section of the patient’s chart. Your practice could also use the Protocol Configuration tool to add the Communication Preferences component to a chart note, the standard phone note, or the Medical Summary.

Preferred Contact Method: Some registries (such as CAIR in California) state that the secondary “Preferred Contact Method” field must be sent to the registry if it is collected, but the field may be empty. From past experience with immunization registries, PCC recommends that all practices, regardless of state, fill this field with the patient or family’s contact preferences for information related to immunization registries. For example, if the family does not wish to be contacted, select “No Reminders and No Recalls”.

Patient Immunization Registry Status: Some registries require that a patient status be included with vaccine record submissions. You can meet this requirement by enabling the Patient Immunization Registry Status field in the Communication Preferences component and recording patients’ status there. The Patient Immunization Registry Status is independent from the patient and account flags on your PCC system. If you have the Patient Immunization Registry Status field enabled, you must manually ensure that it reflects patients’ status with your practice. Contact PCC Support to speak with an immunization registry support specialist who can help you use this field in accordance with your registry’s guidelines.

Review and Update Patient’s Personal Contacts

During each visit, review and update the patient’s Personal Contact. The Personal Contact component appears in the Demographics section of the patient’s chart. A contact is required by the HL7 standard.

For Every Patient, Fill Out VFC Eligibility During Each Visit

You must state whether or not a patient was eligible for VFC for every shot administered. PCC EHR can’t determine that for you, but it can provide your clinicians with all the information they need to determine eligibility and display a tool for assigning it quickly.

Train your staff to review the information and select VFC eligibility status during each visit.

Last Answer: At the patient’s next visit, PCC EHR will remember the patient’s previous VFC eligibility status. They can click “Last Answer” to enter it for all immunization orders.

Complete the Required Fields on the Immunization Component in the Chart Note

When recording immunization administration, you must fill out the VFC, Dose, Lot #, VIS, VIS Given date, Route, and Site fields per immunization.

Immunization History

When you are enter historical immunizations, be sure to select a “Source” from the dropdown.


Bidirectional Immunization Registry Interfaces

Certain practices now have the ability to retrieve immunization records on demand from their state registry at the click of a button in PCC EHR.

This feature is being rolled out one registry at a time and is currently available to practices in Alabama, Alaska, Arkansas, California, Colorado, Connecticut, Delaware, Florida, Georgia, Hawaii, Idaho, Illinois, Indiana, Kansas, Kentucky, Louisiana, Maryland, Michigan, Mississippi, Missouri, Nebraska, Nevada, New Hampshire, New Jersey, New Mexico, New York City, North Carolina, Ohio, Oklahoma, Oregon, Pennsylvania, Philadelphia, South Carolina, Tennessee, U.S. Virgin Islands, Vermont, Virginia, Washington, and Wyoming.

If you are interested in being able to use this feature once it becomes available in your state, contact PCC Support.

Patient Portal Practice Settings and Configuration

/in /by

Your practice can configure what details and options appear in My Kid’s Chart, PCC’s patient portal.

Patient Portal Configuration

Use the Configuration tab of the Patient Portal Configuration tool to change or update what your patient portal users will see.


Use the checkboxes to determine what will appear in My Kid’s Chart for all users. Configuration changes are practice-wide, for all patients and all locations. (Note that specific orders can also be hidden on a case-by-case basis with the “Display on Patient Reports” checkbox within the orders themselves.)

Use the image and list below to review your options.

Turned Off By Default: Care Plans and Payments, as well as patient sex, race, ethnicity, preferred language, and smoking status are not visible in My Kid’s Chart by default. Your practice can check the boxes to enable these features.

  • Set Age-Based Privacy: The age-based privacy setting sets the age of emancipation for patients in My Kid’s Chart. When a patient reaches this age, all of their medical information is automatically hidden from all portal accounts (including their own). Your office can grant account access to patients above this age on an account-by-account basis. For more information, read Patient Portal User Account Administration.

  • Clinical Instructions: Your practice can share clinical instructions through the Patient Portal. You can add any generic chart note component to the Clinical Instructions, and they will appear in the portal.


    Separate Configuration for the Patient Visit Summary Report: The configuration for Clinical Instructions in My Kid’s Chart is independent of the configuration for Clinical Instructions in the Patient Visit Summary Report. Read more here about configuring Clinical Instructions in the PVS.

  • Personal Balance: The Personal Balance feature is turned on for all practices by default. This feature allows patients’ families to see their outstanding balance within the portal. The Personal Balance feature must be turned on before your practice can receive payments through the patient portal.

  • Payments: Your practice can choose to enable auto-posting of payments made through your patient portal. You will need to select a payment type for each credit card listed, which will be used to identify portal payments in PCC reports. If you do not have an appropriate payment type option, you can add one in the Payment Types table in Partner, or contact your CA for help. For more information, read Get Started with Patient Portal Payments.

  • Secure Messaging: Your practice can turn the Secure Messaging features of My Kid’s Chart on or off.

  • Secure Messaging Disclaimer: If your practices allows secure messaging to and from your practice, you can customize a message that will appear at the top of the screen whenever a portal user creates a new message.

Access Controlled: Like other configuration items, the Patient Portal Configuration tool is limited to those users with an appropriate user role. Use the User Administration Tool to review your practice’s roles and control who can make changes to My Kid’s Chart.

Automatic Privacy in My Kid’s Chart When a Patient Becomes an Adult

The My Kid’s Chart patient portal will automatically hide all patient records from all users when a patient reaches your practice’s defined emancipation age.

After the patient’s birthday, they will appear with a “Privacy Enabled” flag on the user’s account.

A parent or patient will still see that the patient is connected to their account, but they will not see any information about upcoming appointments and they will not be able to review patient records.


This feature meets HIPAA privacy guidelines and improves patient security. Here are some issues to keep in mind:

  • Messages Are Still Available: If your practice uses the Messages feature of My Kid’s Chart, parents will still be able to send your office messages and questions in relation to connected patients, even after they turn eighteen. Your staff should keep this in mind when responding to incoming questions on the Messaging queue in PCC EHR.

  • 18, 16, or 21?: Age eighteen is the My Kid’s Chart default emancipation age, but your practice can set your state’s emancipation age in the Patient Portal Configuration tool, as shown above.

  • Special Circumstances: If your practice has teenage patients who use your patient portal, you may need to manually grant them access to their own records after they reach emancipation age. Or, if an adult patient has a guardian, that person may need to be granted access to the patient’s record. For help working with individual portal accounts, read Patient Portal User Account Administration.

Configure the Practice Address that Appears in My Kid’s Chart

If your practice uses PCC’s Care Center features to manage patients for several different pediatric offices that use the same practice database, you may want to set which office address each patient portal user will see when they log into My Kid’s Chart.

Use the Practice Preferences tool to set which location address appears in the patient portal, as well as on the Health Information Summary report.


After setting this option, the patient portal and the Health Information Summary will automatically display either your practice’s default address or the patient’s care center address. If the patient has no care center assigned, they will see the practice’s default address instead.

If a parent has several patients who visit physicians at different care centers, both addresses will appear for them when they log in to My Kid’s Chart.

Configure Which Growth Charts are Visible in the Patient Portal

Your practice can control which growth charts are shown in the patient portal by checking the box within the Portal Display column in the Growth Chart Configuration tool.

By default, the same Growth Charts that you use in PCC EHR will be visible to families in the portal. You can uncheck any that you don’t want showing up in the portal, or you can decide to disable growth charts in the portal entirely by unchecking the Growth Charts option in the Patient Portal Configuration tool.

Do You Hide Vitals Now? Growth Charts Displays Them: Your practice can specifically set whether or not to display patient vitals from each encounter in the patient portal. Growth Charts also display vitals collected by your practice. If you prefer to hide vitals information on chart notes and patient summaries, you may also wish to turn off Growth Charts.

Configure Where the Patient Portal Users Component Appears in PCC EHR

The Patient Portal Users component is added by default to the Patient Check-In protocol and to the Demographics section of the patient’s chart.

The chart-wide Patient Portal Users component can be added wherever else you need it, such as on phone notes, on the Medical Summary, or on every appropriate well visit protocol. By placing it in the context of the other work your practice does, you’ll be able to support your families better.

Use the Protocol Configuration tool to edit chart note protocols and chart sections.

Change the Default Logout Time in My Kid’s Chart

After 5 minutes of inactivity, My Kid’s Chart will log a user out. PCC can customize the logout time for your practice. Contact PCC Support for more information.

Customize the Patient Portal Message Protocol

When your practice sends or receives a patient portal message, you work with a Portal Message protocol that includes the message information.

Your practice can customize this protocol to include other tools that your staff may find useful when responding to a portal message. For example, you could add the “Recent and Upcoming Appointments” component, or the “Forms” component.

To make changes to the Portal Message protocol, open Protocol Configuration from the Configuration menu and click “Protocol Builder”. The Portal Message protocol is listed with other protocols at your practice.


You can add, delete, and edit the components that appear when you work with portal messages.


Once you add a component, it will be available to your staff on every portal message sent or received afterwards.

Turn On and Customize Patient Portal Message Templates

PCC EHR includes three optional patient portal message templates that you can use as-is, or customize to work better for your office. You can also create your own messaging templates.

To work with patient portal message templates, click on the Messaging Templates tab of the Patient Portal Configuration tool.


Note: In order to use portal messaging templates, your practice must have Secure Messaging enabled in the Configuration tab.

Highlight the template you want to turn on and click “Edit”.

Select the “Display in Portal” checkbox.

You can also choose to automatically assign incoming messages of a certain template to a specific person at your practice.

You can make additional edits to the contents of your portal messages, and you can also create your own custom message templates. For more information, read the Guide to Portal Messaging Template Configuration.

Set Portal Message Conversations Inactivity

Portal Messaging includes the option to prevent replies to a message thread after a selected number of days. This is set in Patient Portal Configuration.

You can select any number of days, from 1 to 99. Keep in mind that selecting too short a date range can prevent users from replying at all, so select a reasonable length of time.

If the portal user does not send a reply within the selected number of days, the conversation will become inactive and additional replies cannot be sent. The countdown resets every time a reply is sent.

 

Connect to PCC Services using a VPN

/in /by

In most cases, PCC recommends using SecureConnect to connect remotely to your PCC server. However, if your practice has specific needs (such as remote printing) that necessitate using a VPN to connect to your PCC server, follow the steps below to learn how to obtain a VPN key, install and configure VPN software, install and configure RDP software, and connect.

Why Does PCC Use VPN and RDP?: To protect PHI, best security practice includes the use of a VPN (virtual private network) between remote computers and your PCC server. A VPN provides a secure, encrypted “tunnel” for data communication between your remote computer and your PCC server. The Remote Desktop Protocol interface provides a low-latency solution to using a software program, like PCC EHR, without data loss, and additionally provides a reliable, consistent interface that doesn’t rely on you installing PCC software at home.

Use pocketPCC Instead: You can review your schedule, see many sections of a patient’s chart, and create phone notes on any internet-connected device using pocketPCC. You only need a VPN and RDP connection when you wish to run the full, desktop versions of PCC’s products and services.

Get Started: Contact PCC Support

Before you can set up a VPN connection on your home computer, you must contact your practice’s System Administrator and PCC Support.

PCC will generate a secure encryption key and send it to you in an e-mail. The key will work only for you.

Windows PC: Install and Configure Remote Connection Software

Follow these instructions to install and configure VPN and RDP software on a personal computer running the Windows operating system.

Check Your E-Mail

Upon request, PCC will send authorized users an e-mail with a VPN key.

Temporarily Disable Your PC’s Virus Protection Software

This step is optional, but recommended. Your anti-virus software may interfere with the steps below, including downloading .zip and .exe files and installing the VPN software. Turn it off before proceeding.

Save the E-Mail Attachment to Your PC

Save the .zip file that is attached to the VPN e-mail. You can save it to your desktop or somewhere in your Documents folder.

The filename will be your practice’s PCC client acronym followed by “.zip”. For example, if you work at Bedrock Prehistoric Pediatric Partners, your client acronym may be BPPP. The file attached to your e-mail will be “bppp.zip”.

Download the OpenVPN GUI Application Installer

Use a web browser to download the OpenVPN GUI application installer. The link to the installer is:

https://build.openvpn.net/downloads/releases/openvpn-install-2.3.18-I602-x86_64.exe


Run the OpenVPN Installer

Run the OpenVPN installer by double-clicking on the downloaded file, “OpenVPN-InstCfgWiz.exe”.


Follow Installer Steps to Install OpenVPN GUI

Follow the installer steps by clicking “Install” and “Next” for each step.



When Prompted, Select Your VPN .zip File

When the installer prompts you for your VPN .zip file, click on the button and browse to the .zip file that you saved in the steps above.



The filename will be your practice’s PCC client acronym followed by “.zip”. For example, if you work at Bedrock Prehistoric Pediatric Partners, your client acronym may be BPPP. The file attached to your e-mail will be “bppp.zip”.

When the installer is finished, click “Close”.

Re-Enable Your Virus Protection

If you disabled your virus protection software, re-enable it once the installation is complete.

Run OpenVPN GUI

When the installation is complete, you will see a new icon on your desktop labeled “OpenVPN GUI”. You can also find it through your Windows Start menu.

Double-click on the “OpenVPN GUI” icon on your desktop (or single-click in your Start menu).

Use the OpenVPN Icon to Start a Connection

The OpenVPN icon will appear in the lower-right corner of your screen, either directly in the system tray on your task bar, or behind the reveal arrow in your task bar. That icon operates the VPN tunnel to your practice. Double-click on the toolbar icon to start the VPN connection.


Enter Your PCC Username and Password

When prompted, enter your PCC username and password. Use the same username and password you use to log in to PCC EHR.

Confirm the Connection is Working

The toolbar icon in the lower-right corner will turn green, indicating that the VPN tunnel is now open.

Run Remote Desktop Connection

Now that your VPN tunnel connection is open, run the Remote Desktop Connection application.

Search your computer for “Remote Desktop Connection” and run the Program result.

Configure For Easy Connection: If you are configuring a computer that will connect to your office on a regular basis, you can create an alias of the Remote Desktop Connection program on your desktop or pin it to your task bar. Just right-click on the application and select “Pin to Start Menu” or “Pin to Task Bar”.

Enter Your Practice’s Server Name, a Colon, and a Port Number

In the Remote Desktop Connection application, enter the “Computer” to which you want to connect.


The computer you wish to connect to is your practice’s PCC server. The name of your server consists of your client acronym and “pcc.com”. If you work at Beagle Pediatrics Unlimited, for example, your domain might be “bpu.pcc.com”. You must also enter a colon (:) and specify the port number 9989, as shown.

Security Note: 9989 is not the standard RDP port. PCC uses port 9989 as an added security feature.

Set It Once, RDC Will Remember: After you enter the address and port number once, and connect, the Remote Desktop Connection application will remember your preferences. If you want, you can click “Show Options” and enter a username as well, and then save your settings.

Click Connect

Click “Connect” to open a remote desktop connection to your practice’s PCC Server.

Enter Login Information

Use your PCC username and password to log in. Use the same username and password you use to log in to PCC EHR.

Depending on your PCC Server configuration, you may see a default login or a PCC-branded login.

From the Desktop, Click “Start” and Select a PCC Program or Service

RDP creates a secure, virtual workspace for running PCC programs. You can click on the start penguin to open Partner, PCC EHR, the PCC EHR Configuration tool, SquirrelMail, Firefox, or a terminal.

Log Out

When you are finished, click on the penguin and select “Logout…”. If you do not log out, your programs will remain running.

Configuration is Finished, Next Time…

Now that you have configured your PC to connect to your practice’s PCC server, you can connect at any time with fewer steps. The Remote Desktop Connection application, for example, will remember your practice’s name and the 9989 port.

For a refresher of just the connection steps, or to help whoever you configured this PC for, read Connect to Your PCC System from Home.

Apple Macintosh: Install and Configure Remote Connection Software

Follow these instructions to install and configure VPN and RDP software on a personal computer running the Macintosh OSX operating system.

Check Your E-Mail

Upon request, PCC will send authorized users an e-mail with a VPN key. Look for an e-mail from the “root” user of your PCC Server. It will have an attachment.

Save the E-Mail Attachment to Your Macintosh

Save the .zip file that is attached to the VPN e-mail. You can save the file on your desktop or in another folder.

The filename will be your practice’s PCC client acronym followed by “.zip”. For example, if you work at Bedrock Prehistoric Pediatric Partners, your client acronym may be BPPP. The file attached to your e-mail will be “bppp.zip”.

Download the Tunnelblick Application

Use your Web browser to download the latest version of Tunnelblick, the Macintosh VPN software application. The link to the installer is on this page:
https://tunnelblick.net/downloads.html

PCC recommends you download the current “Stable” release of the Tunnelblick software.

Install the Tunnelblick Application

Open the downloaded Tunnelblick.dmg file. You can double-click on the Application to automatically install it, or drag the application to your Applications folder. Optionally, you can add the application to your Dock.

Run Tunnelblick Automatically: If you connect every day, you may choose to add Tunneblick to your system login items. Under the Apple menu, select System Preferences–>Users & Groups–>Login Items, and click the plus (+) button.

Was the Installation Successful?

When the Tunnelblick application is installed and running, you will notice a tunnel-shaped icon in the menu bar in the upper-right corner of your screen. That icon operates the VPN tunnel to your practice’s terminal server.

Double-Click on the .zip File and Open the Enclosed .ovpn File

Find the .zip attachment you saved to your Macintosh and double-click to decompress it. In the resulting folder, double-click on .ovpn file.


The filenames will begin with your practice’s PCC client acronym. For example, if you work at Bedrock Prehistoric Pediatric Partners, your client acronym may be BPPP. The file attached to your e-mail will be “bppp.zip” and the enclosed file will be “bppp.ovpn”.

Your Macintosh will open Tunnelblick using your .ovpn VPN file. Tunnelblick will ask whether the key is for all users or just you, and ask you to confirm the installation with your username and password. Use the username and password for your Macintosh.


Click on the Tunnelblick Icon and Select “Connect…”

Click on the Tunnelblick Icon and select the connection to your office.


Enter Your PCC Username and Password

When prompted, enter your PCC username and password. Use the same username and password you use to log in to PCC EHR.

Confirm the Connection is Working

The tunnel icon will turn solid, indicating that the VPN tunnel is now open.

Install Microsoft Remote Desktop

Launch the App Store and install Microsoft Remote Desktop.


You can launch the App Store by selecting “Software Update” from the Apple menu, and then search for Microsoft Remote Desktop.

Run Microsoft Remote Desktop

Run the Microsoft Remote Desktop application. You can find it in your Applications folder. You can also add it to your Dock for quick access.


Add a New Server

The first time you run Microsoft Remote Desktop, you will need to add your practice’s PCC server information as well as your PCC login information. Click Add Desktop and fill out the information as shown.

Your “User Account” information is your PCC username and password.

Replace “Bedrock Pediatrics” with your Practice name or other easy to remember name for your connection to the server. Use your office’s PCC acronym for the PC name field. If you do not know your office’s PCC name, contact PCC Support at 800-722-1082 or ask your office’s system administrator.

  • PC Name: your PCC acronym, with pcc.com and port 9989: acronym.pcc.com:9989

  • User Account: use the menu to enter your PCC credentials

  • Friendly Name: your name for your practice

Optionally, you can configure your connection’s display and other window settings.

Click Save to close the window, and Microsoft Remote Desktop will save your new connection settings.

Add Microsoft Remote Desktop to Your Dock: If you will be connecting often, you can add Microsoft Remote Desktop to your dock. Either drag the application to your Dock, or right-click on the Dock icon when the program is running and select Options–>Keep in Dock.

Open an RDP Connection to Your Office’s Server

When you want to connect to your office, check that your Tunnelblick connection is still running, run Microsoft Remote Desktop, and double-click on your office’s PCC server.

From the Desktop, Click “Start” and Select a PCC Program or Service

RDP creates a secure, virtual workspace for running PCC programs. Click on the start penguin to open Partner, PCC EHR, the PCC EHR Configuration tool, SquirrelMail, Firefox, or a terminal.

Log Out

When you are finished, click on the penguin and select “Logout…”. If you do not log out, your programs will remain running.

Configuration is Finished, Next Time…

Now that you have configured your Macintosh to connect to your practice’s PCC server, you can connect at any time with fewer steps. The Microsoft Remote Desktop Connection application, for example, will remember your practice’s name and the 9989 port.

Windows PC: Connect to Your Practice’s PCC Server

After completing the configuration above, follow the procedure below to connect to your office using a Windows PC computer. These instructions are generally the same for Windows XP through Windows 10. (PCC recommends you update all PCs to Windows 7 or better.)

Run OpenVPN GUI

Double-click on the “OpenVPN GUI” icon on your desktop (or single-click in your Start menu).

Use the OpenVPN Icon to Start a Connection

The OpenVPN icon will appear in the lower-right corner of your screen, either directly in the system tray on your task bar, or behind the reveal arrow in your task bar. That icon operates the VPN tunnel to your practice. Double-click on the toolbar icon to start the VPN connection.


Enter Your PCC Username and Password

When prompted, enter your PCC username and password. Use the same username and password you use to log in to PCC EHR.

Confirm the Connection is Working

The toolbar icon in the lower-right corner will turn green, indicating that the VPN tunnel is now open.

Run Remote Desktop Connection

Now that your VPN tunnel connection is open, run the Remote Desktop Connection application.

Search your computer for “Remote Desktop Connection” and run the Program result.

Configure For Easy Connection: If you are configuring a computer that will connect to your office on a regular basis, you can create an alias of the Remote Desktop Connection program on your desktop or pin it to your task bar. Just right-click on the application and select “Pin to Start Menu” or “Pin to Task Bar”.

Review or Enter Your Practice’s Server Name, a Colon, and a Port Number

Your practice’s PCC server address and RDP port should appear in the Computer field on your screen.

If it doesn’t, you can enter it and the program will remember the address the next time you connect. The computer you wish to connect to is your practice’s PCC server. The name of your server consists of your client acronym and “pcc.com”. If you work at Beagle Pediatrics Unlimited, for example, your domain might be “bpu.pcc.com”. You must also enter a colon (:) and specify the port number 9989, as shown.

Click Connect

Click “Connect” to open a remote desktop connection to your practice’s PCC Server.

Enter Login Information

Use your PCC username and password to log in. Use the same username and password you use to log in to PCC EHR.

Depending on your PCC Server configuration, you may see a default login or a PCC-branded login.

From the Desktop, Click “Start” and Select a PCC Program or Service

RDP creates a secure, virtual workspace for running PCC programs. You can click on the start penguin to open Partner, PCC EHR, the PCC EHR Configuration tool, SquirrelMail, Firefox, or a terminal.

Log Out

When you are finished, click on the penguin and select “Logout…”. If you do not log out, your programs will remain running.

Macintosh OS X: Connect to Your Practice’s PCC Server

Follow the procedure below to connect to your office using a Macintosh computer after completing the Macintosh configuration above.

Run TunnelBlick

If it is not already running, open the TunnelBlick application from your Applications folder or Dock.

Click on the Tunnel Icon and Connect to Your Practice’s VPN

Click on the Tunnelblick Icon on your menu bar and select the connection to your office.


Run Microsoft Remote Desktop

Run the Microsoft Remote Desktop application. You can find it in your Applications folder or your Dock.


Connect to Your Office’s PCC Server

In the list of “My Desktops”, double-click on your office’s PCC server.

Wait for Connection, Enter Username and Password if Requested

A new screen will open and the program will connect to your practice’s server. You may be asked to re-enter your username and password. Use the same username and password you use to log in to PCC EHR.

From the Desktop, Click “Start” and Select a PCC Program or Service

RDP creates a secure, virtual workspace for running PCC programs. Click on the start penguin to open Partner, PCC EHR, the PCC EHR Configuration tool, SquirrelMail, Firefox, or a terminal.

Log Out

When you are finished, click on the penguin and select “Logout…”. If you do not log out, your programs will remain running.

Update from Microsoft Remote Desktop 8 to Microsoft Remote Desktop 10

In 2018, Microsoft will deprecate version 8 of their Macintosh Remote Desktop application. If you use Microsoft Remote Desktop 8, you may be prompted to download an update to version 10. You can also download the newer application using the instructions above.

When you update to version 10, you will lose your configuration and saved connection settings.

You can work with a PCC Technical Solutions team member to set up your remote connection again, or use the instructions above. Alternatively, before you update you can open Microsoft Remote Desktop 8, export your settings, and then import them to Microsoft Remote Desktop 10.

VPN Software Options

The above instructions show you how to install OpenVPN or Tunnelblick, along with your private VPN key, to open a VPN tunnel to your PCC practice.

There are many VPN software options other than OpenVPN and Tunnelblick. PCC has also successfully used Viscosity for the Macintosh system.

For help understanding your software options, contact PCC Support.

RDP Server Options for Your Practice

RDP (Remote Desktop Protocol) creates a secure desktop environment on a remote computer. RDP opens a portal to a desktop environment that runs on your practice’s PCC server.

Your office can choose which RDP service runs on the PCC server at your practice. You can use the free xRDP service which runs by default or set up and install a Windows RDP server.

xRDP

xRDP is a free Linux-based solution that runs on your PCC server. In your remote office or at home, you can run RDP client software on your personal computer (see instructions above) and a window will open displaying a Linux-based desktop environment. In that desktop window, you can run PCC programs.

The advantages of xRDP are that it is free, quick to install and configure, and provides access to remote or home offices. The disadvantages are that some users do not wish to use a Linux desktop environment, RDP is slower than working in the office, and xRDP sometimes fails to establish new connections.

xRDP is not developed or maintained by PCC, it is a third-party service that runs on your PCC server.

Windows RDP

Large practices may choose to install and maintain a Windows RDP server. Remote users would run RDP client software (see below) and a window would open and display a Windows-based desktop environment. In that desktop window, they would run PCC programs.

The advantages of Windows RDP are that it is stable, actively developed, and presents the user with a familiar OS interface. The disadvantage is the significant cost, both for licensing the software and installing and maintaining an additional server at your practice.

Choosing the Best Solution For Your Practice

Work with PCC Support to discuss your remote connection needs. We’ll help you design a solution that’s perfect for you, and we provide ongoing support to test and reconfigure your connections as your needs evolve.

PCC’s Pediatric Billing Drop-In Sessions

/in /by

PCC’s subject matter experts, including Jan Blanchard (CPC, CPEDC), host web labs about pediatric practice management, billing, coding, and other topics. Whether or not you are a PCC client, you can sign up to attend one. At PCC’s Billing Drop-In web labs, we discuss your questions and often preview upcoming billing functionality in PCC EHR.

Attend the Next PCC “Get Clients Paid” Web Lab

You can sign up for the next PCC Web Lab by clicking here:

http://www.pcc.com/weblabs/

Watch a Previous Session

Click in the table below below to review archived presentation files, video, or accompanying materials for PCC’s billing and coding web labs.

Date Topics Presentation Additional Links and Handouts
2024 December 2024-12 Pediatric Billing Drop-In Register, or see all web labs
2024 November 2024-11 Pediatric Billing Drop-In slides video
2024 October 2024-10 Pediatric Billing Drop-In slides video
2024 September 2024-09 Pediatric Billing Drop-In slides video
2024 August 2024-08 Pediatric Billing Drop-In slides, ICD-10 Pediatric Highlights video
2024 July Pediatric Billing Drop-In at PCC’s Users’ Conference video
2024 June 2024-06 Pediatric Billing Drop-In slides video
2024 May 2024-05 Pediatric Billing Drop-In slides video
2024 April 2024-04 Pediatric Billing Drop-In slides video
2024 March 2024-03 Pediatric Billing Drop-In slides video
2024 February 2024-02 Pediatric Billing Drop-In slides video HIPAA Complaint Form, Banking and Insurance Commissioners Membership List, NC Medicaid COBID Vax Counseling Bulletin, KFF Article: Section 1115 Waiver Watch: Continuous Eligibility Waivers
2024 January 2024-01 Pediatric Billing Drop-In slides video PCC’s 2024 E&M Coding Tool, AETNA Beyfortus Publication
2023 December 2023-12 Pediatric Billing Drop-In slides video
2023 November 2023-11 Pediatric Billing Drop-In slides video
2023 October 2023-10 Pediatric Billing Drop-In slides video
2023 September 2023-09 Pediatric Billing Drop-In slides video
2023 August 2023-08 Pediatric Billing Drop-In slides video 2024 ICD-10 Update Presentation Slides
2023 July 2023-07 Pediatric Billing Drop-In… at PCC’s 2023 Users’ Conference! Register for Remote or In-Person Attendance
2023 June 2023-06 Pediatric Billing Drop-In slides video
2023 May 2023-05 Pediatric Billing Drop-In slides video April ICD-10 Addendum Pediatric Highlights
2023 April 2023-04 Pediatric Billing Drop-In slides video
2023 March 2023-03 Pediatric Billing Drop-In slides video
2023 February 2023-02 Pediatric Billing Drop-In slides video
2023 January 2023-01 Pediatric Billing Drop-In slides video
2022 December 2022-12 Pediatric Billing Drop-In slides video
2022 November 2022-11 Pediatric Billing Drop-In slides video
2022 October 2022-10 Pediatric Billing Drop-In slides video Care Management Coding Reference
2022 September 2022-09 Pediatric Billing Drop-In slides video 2023 New Pediatric ICD-10 Codes
2022 August 2022-08 Pediatric Billing Drop-In slides video 2023 New Pediatric ICD-10 Codes
2022 June 2022-06 Pediatric Billing Drop-In video
2022 May 2022-05 Pediatric Billing Drop-In video
2022 April 2022-04 Pediatric Billing Drop-In video
2022 March 2022-03 Pediatric Billing Drop-In video
2022 February 2022-02 Pediatric Billing Drop-In video
2022 January 2022-01 Pediatric Billing Drop-In video
2021 December 2021-12 Pediatric Billing Drop-In video
2021 November 2021-11 Pediatric Billing Drop-In video
2021 November Pediatric COVID-19 Vaccine Community Forum video
2021 September Billing Drop-In Session: Code Updates and 2022 ICD-10 slides
2021 April 12th PCC’s CHADIS Integration Q&A slides video
2021 April 2nd Cures Act: Information Blocking Q&A slides video
2021 March 17 Code Updates and 2021 Evaluation and Management “FAQ&A” slides video
2020 December 15 2021 Evaluation and Management “FAQ&A” FAQ video
2020 November 17 2021 Evaluation and Management Coding Workshop slides video
2020 September 15 2021 ICD-10 Updates Continued!, Coding Guidance, PCC Release Highlights, and a PM Roundtable Discussion slides video
2020 August 20 2021 ICD-10 Updates, AAP Coding Guidance, PCC’s 8.13 Release, and Your Questions slides video
2020 March 19 COVID-19, Telemedicine, AAP Newsletter, and a Live Coding Roundtable slides video
2020 February 11 The Practice Management Calendar, PCC Updates, and a Live Practice Management Roundtable slides video
2020 January 9th Holiday Billing, 2019 Retrospective, PCC update news, and Live Billing Roundtable slides video
2019 December 19th 2020 CPT, Practice Management Calendar, AAP, PCC Updates, and Live Practice Management Roundtable slides video
2019 November 13th 2020 CPT, AAP, PCC Updates, and Live Billing Roundtable slides video
2019 September 19th ICD-10 Update, AAP Coding Newsletters, and Live Practice Management Roundtable slides video Note: Audio for this video was lost. Tune in next month!
2019 August 14th 2020 ICD-10 Update, AAP Coding Newsletters, PCC News, and Billing Roundtable slides video
2019 June 25th PCC news, 2020 ICD-10 preview, AAP news, and your coding questions slides video
2019 May 16th Summer Maintenance, AAP Coding Newsletter, PCC News, Practice Management Roundtable slides video
2019 April 17th Incident To Billing, AAP Coding news, PCC news, and Billing Roundtable slides video
2019 March 20th AAP coding updates, PCC news, and more slides video
2019 February 27th 2018 coding data, appeal letters, denials, posters, slides video
2019 January Federal holidays, cost per RVU, 2018 retrospective, and a practice management roundtable slides video
2018 December 18th EOY Lists, AAP Coding Newsletter Highlights, and More slides video
2018 November 15th 2019 CPT Updates and More slides video
2018 September 18th 2019 ICD-10 and More slides video Addendum to Tabular Section of the ICD-10 Manual
2018 July 18th UC Resources, ICD-10, Vaccine Updates and More slides N/A
2018 May 15th NCCI, AAP Newsletter Highlights, and PCC Release slides N/A
2017 December 13th 2018 CPT Updates, AAP Newsletter Highlights, and PCC Release slides video
2017 November 14th Your Coding Questions, User Lists, and AAP Newsletter Highlights slides video
2017 October 19th ICD-10 2018 Highlights and Your Coding Questions slides video
2017 September 13th Coding Questions, AAP Coding Newsletter Highlights, PCC 8.1 Release slides video
2017 August 15th ICD-10 2018 Highlights and Your Coding Questions slides video
2017 June 15th Answers to Your Coding Questions and News From the AAP Coding Newsletter slides video
2017 May 17th Answers to Your Coding Questions, Recent Updates slides video
2017 April 18th Quarterly Coding Updates, AAP Coding Newsletter Highlights, 2017 SNOMED Updates slides video
2017 March 16th Your Coding Questions and AAP Coding Newsletter Highlights slides video
2017 February Your Coding Questions and AAP Coding Newsletter Highlights slides video
2017 January 17th 2017 RVU Changes, AAP Coding NL, Q&A, PCC Release highlights slides video
2016 December 16th CPT 2017, PCC 7.6, Mapping and Your Questions slides video SNOMED-CT to ICD-10 Manual Mapping Lists
2016 November 9th PCC 7.6, ICD-10 2017 Guideline Edits, November’s AAP Coding Newsletter, and Your Questions slides video
2016 October 18th PCC 7.6, NCCI Updates, Coding for Places of Service, HPCPS, and More slides video
2016 September 15th 2017 ICD-10 Update and Other News slides video
2016 August 17th Monthly Coding Web Lab slides video
2016 June 14th Monthly Coding Web Lab slides video
2016 May 18th Monthly Coding Web Lab slides video
2016 April 12th Monthly Coding Web Lab slides video
2016 March 15th Monthly Coding Web Lab slides video
2016 February 18th Monthly Coding Web Lab slides video
2016 January 13th Monthly Coding Web Lab slides video
2015 November 17th Monthly Coding Web Lab slides video
2015 October 16th ICD-10 Claims slides video
2015 October 6th ICD-10 Post-Game Web Lab slides video
2015 September 30th ICD-10 Pre-Game Web Lab slides video
2015 September Monthly Coding Web Lab slides video
2015 August ICD-10 Configuration for Partner slides
2015 August ICD-10 Configuration for PCC EHR slides video
2015 August ICD-10 Coding Topics slides
2015 July Billing Topics slides video
2015 June Clinical Topics slides video
2015 May ADHD slides video
2015 April Eczema and BMI slides video
2015 March BMI and Dietary Counseling slides video
2015 February Asthma, Imms, Flu, Well Care, Screenings slides video
2015 January OM, 59 Modifier Changes slides video
2014 December slides video
2014 November slides video
2014 October slides
2014 September slides
2014 April slides
2014 March slides
2014 February slides
2014 January slides

Other Links, Resources, and Publications

As you attend or watch one of PCC’s billing web labs, you may hear about common coding references, websites, or other resources.

  • PCCTalk: PCC users ask coding and billing questions on PCCTalk, our online forum and e-mail newsletter community. Sign up to get started.
  • AAP Pediatric Coding Newsletter: All PCC clients have unlimited access to the AAP’s Pediatric Coding Newsletter, along with the Pediatric Red Book and other educational resources.
  • ICD-10 Transition Help: During the national transition to ICD-10 billing, PCC produced web labs and other content, and collected resources to help pediatric practices make the change.

11-2015 Sanofi Recall for Auvi-Q Epinephrine

/in /by

Does your practice prescribe Sanofi’s Auvi-Q epinephrine injectors (“epi-pens”) to your patients? Sanofi has announced a nationwide recall of all strengths and all lot numbers.

PCC EHR has tools and reports that can help you contact patients affected by this recall. You can use the Patient Lists tool, or PCC eRx, to find patients who have a record of an Auvi-Q prescription in their chart.

Your Results May Vary: Sometimes the pharmacy selects the brand of epinephrine pen, and sometimes a patient may receive their prescription from a specialist or other care provider. PCC EHR can only report on the prescription details found in the patient’s chart. Your practice may elect to announce this recall to your patients based on broader criteria, such as all patients with severe allergies on their Problem List.

Recall Details

“The Sanofi recall involves all Auvi-Q currently on the market. It includes both the 0.15 mg and 0.3 mg strengths for hospitals, retailers and consumers. This includes lot numbers 2081278 through 3037230, which expire October 2015 through December 2016. The products have been found to potentially have inaccurate dosage delivery, which may include failure to deliver drug.”

(https://www.auvi-q.com/)

Use the Patient Lists Tool

You can use the Patient Lists tool, in the Tools menu, to get a quick list of all patients with an Auvi-Q prescription and/or a general epinephrine prescription. You could also create a list of patients with anaphylaxis or other allergy diagnoses in their Problem List.

Open the Patient Lists Report Tool

Click on the Reports menu and select “Patient Lists”.

auviqrecall01

Click “Add”

Click “Add” to add a new patient list.
auviqrecall02

Add Title, Time Range, and Click to Add a Medication Criteria

On the Add Patient List screen, enter a title for your new list. Review the time range, and then click “Add” next to the Medications criteria.

auviqrecall03
For the widest possible search, use the “From patient’s birth through today” time range for the criteria.

Add Auvi-Q, and/or Your Practice’s Unspecified Epinephrine Pen Prescription

Use the drop-down search field to find the Auvi-Q prescription or your practice’s typical generic Epinephrine pen prescription.

auviqrecall04

Can't Find It? Not Sure If Epinephrine Pen Prescriptions Got Auvi-Q?: The Medication criteria for Patient Lists only shows medications that are in at least one patient’s Medication History. If your practice has no records of Auvi-Q or epinephrine, for example, you will not be able to add it as a criteria. If you are worried that a non-specific epinephrine prescription may have been filled with an Auvi-Q, you can add additional prescriptions to the criteria, as shown below.

auviqrecall15

Review Your List Criteria and Save Your Changes

auviqrecall05

Generate the Patient List

Select your patient list and click “Generate List”. Then click “Continue” to see the result.

auviqrecall06
auviqrecall07
auviqrecall08

Optional: Export the Patient List

You can work with the patient list right on the screen.

Optionally, you can click “Save as File” and export the list as a comma-separated-value document. You can import that document into any spreadsheet program, or open it with a Word Processor.

Contact PCC Support for help with the Patient Lists report tool or any features of PCC EHR.

Use the Drug Report Tool in PCC eRx

Alternatively, you can use the Drug Report tool in PCC eRx to find all Auvi-Q prescriptions, or all epinephrine prescriptions.

Visit the “Rx Tasks” Tab and Click “Options”

Open a PCC eRx window, either from the RxTasks queue or from a patient’s chart, and click “Options”.

auviqrecall09

Click “Drug Report”

auviqrecall10

Search for Epinephrine, or Auvi-Q

Use the search field to find Epinephrine, or Auvi-Q. The Drug Report tool can produce various lists based on either the brand name or generic name of a drug. You may want to try a couple of different searches to review your patients’ records.
auviqrecall11

Click the “Free Text” or Specific Prescription Option

Depending on your search, you may need to indicate whether you mean a specific prescription name or a free-text search for all drugs that include your search text. In testing, PCC found better results with the “free text” option.

auviqrecall12

Enter Provider or Date Range Criteria

Select primary care physicians or other care providers, and indicate a date range for when the drug was active. For most situations, you should search for all providers for a wide date range.

Click “Create Report” to view the results.

auviqrecall13

Active or Inactive?: The Drug Report looks for prescriptions that were active within a certain date range, or within the past 30 days, 6 months, etc. Since all Auvi-Q injectors are being recalled, regardless of whether the prescription is active, you may want to use a range that extends back to 2012, for example, when Auvi-Q was first approved.

Review Results, Run a New Search

PCC eRx will display all prescriptions that match the search text and the criteria options. After you review the result, you may want to re-run the Drug Report using a different search term (“epinephrine”, etc.) or criteria.

auviqrecall14

Contact PCC Support for help with the Drug Report or other features in PCC eRx.

Chart Amendment Requests

/in /by

If a patient or family requests that you amend information in their chart, you can now record that amendment request.

For example, if a family objects to a diagnosis in the patient’s chart, you can create an amendment request on the visit for that day.

While viewing a chart note (or phone note or message task), select “Add Amendment Request” from the Edit menu.


Amendment requests appear similar to labs or other orders. You can enter request details and notes, and you can assign the request to a physician or other user for review.

The assigned user can complete the amendment request task from their Messaging queue. When they double-click on the task, the patient’s chart will open and scroll directly to the amendment request.


As you edit an amendment request, you can add a Decision Note and accept, deny, or cancel the request.

The history of the request will remain on the chart note (or wherever the request was added). Later, you can review amendment requests in the Visit History section of the patient’s chart.

Where Can I Create an Amendment Request?: You can create an amendment request on any visit chart note, on a phone note, on order and elab follow-up tasks, and on patient portal messages. You can create a request on a visit even before it is arrived.

Enter and Review Encounter Visit Notes

/in /by

You can add and review visit notes for an encounter in Correct Mistakes (oops).

629pcc01

A visit note is a text note for a specific patient, on a specific encounter date, used for internal purposes at your practice. The note is attached to all charges for the patient on that day. You can use visit notes to record billing details or other information related to an encounter.

Add a Visit Note

As you review an account’s history, press F4 – Insurance Status or F5 – Visit Status, enter item number(s), and then press F4 – Add/Edit Note to view the Visit Notes screen for a set of charges.

629pcc02629pcc03629pcc04

On the Visit Notes screen, press F4 – Post New Note to create a new note.

629pcc05629pcc06629pcc07

Review Visit Notes

After you save a note, it will appear on the main charge history screen in oops.

629pcc19

The oops screen only has room to display the top line of the note. You can use the Visit Notes screen to review the full text of the note or edit the note later.

Here are some other features to keep in mind as you use the visit notes feature:

  • A single note is associated with all charges for a particular visit date, for a particular patient. You can add additional notes about the visit and add followup notes and they will all be associated with all charges for that patient’s visit date.
  • Partner logs and displays who created or who most recently edited each note.
  • If two accounts are merged, or charge information changes in some other way, all notes will follow the charge and visit date with which they are associated.
  • You can make notes visible/invisible by pressing N – Toggle Notes. You can also make billing history items visible/invisible by pressing E – Toggle Billing History.

Learn More About the Notes Screen: When you add or edit a note, you are using Partner’s Structured Notes feature. You can search the visit note and add followup notes, just as you can in the family or patient notes screens, found in the Patient Editor (notjane) and Family Editor (fame).

Summary of Care Record Report

/in /by

The Summary of Care Record report produces a C-CDA-formatted chart summary for a patient.

Your practice can use the report as a transition of care document. Optionally, if your practice uses Direct Secure Messaging, you can transmit the report to another clinician or practice. See what data can be included C-CDA documents.

Generate the Summary of Care Record Report

When you need to create a Summary of Care, select “Summary of Care Record” from the Reports menu.


On the report’s criteria screen, you can indicate whether or not you are creating the record for a referral or transition of care.

Use the options on the screen to print or save the record as a PDF or C-CDA document.

Transition of Care For Meaningful Use: If you have indicated that the record is being created for a referral or transition of care, PCC EHR will track that you have generated the C-CDA document and it will update your Meaningful Use reporting totals.

Output Summary of Care Record for Specific Encounter

When you generate a Summary of Care Record for a referral, you can select a specific referral and optionally limit the output to information from that referral encounter.

First, choose the specific referral order from the selection pull-down menu.


By default, the referral Summary of Care Record will limit procedures, orders, and vitals noted for that given encounter date. (The output also includes the patient’s Problem List and other chart information not specific to a particular encounter.)

Optionally, you can deselect the “Limit to referral encounter” check box, and the Summary of Care report will generate the patient’s complete C-CDA with all available patient information.

The Summary of Care report output includes the patient’s insurance policy information, making it a good solution for referrals.

Transmit a C-CDA Transition of Care Document Using Direct Secure Messaging

If your practice uses Direct Secure Messaging, and you have a Direct Address configured for your user account, you can transmit a Summary of Care Record directly to another Direct Secure Messaging user, such as a specialist for a referral or another pediatric practice.

Select “Send via Direct Secure Message” and fill out the fields for the message.

For a step-by-step guide to sending a Direct Secure Message, read Send and Receive Direct Secure Messages.

Patient Portal Messages vs. Direct Secure Messaging: The patient portal and PCC EHR support two different messaging technologies. Portal messages are a secure, optional messaging tool built into the patient portal. Patient portal users can exchange messages with their pediatric practice, and the practice can receive and send portal messages with PCC EHR or pocketPCC. Direct Secure Messaging, on the other hand, is a specialized message technology used to share and send medical information. It requires registration with a third-party service and it allows for secure transmission of C-CDA transition of care documents or visit summaries. For more information, refer to Receive and Respond to Portal Messages or Direct Secure Messaging.

Customize Your Summary of Care (C-CDA) for Referrals

The Summary of Care (C-CDA) is configurable; instead of sending a full C-CDA to other care providers, you can select exactly which sections of the C-CDA to include.

Select which sections to include or omit by using the Summary of Care Record Configuration tool.


Practice-Wide Settings: The settings in the Summary of Care Record Configuration tool will apply to all EHR users.

When you run the Summary of Care Record report, it will only include the sections your practice has chosen.


Permission to use the Summary of Care Record Configuration tool is role-based.

Get Started with Direct Secure Messaging

/in /by

Direct Secure Messaging, available in PCC EHR, is a communication technology used to exchange private medical information. Direct Secure Messaging requires special registration and unique addresses that are similar to, but not the same as, email.

Watch the Video: Watch Get Started with Direct Secure Messaging to learn how to configure your PCC system to send, receive, and reconcile direct secure messages.

If your practice activates Direct Secure Messaging and you register clinical users, you can:

  • Send a direct secure message containing a Summary of Care (also called a Transition of Care) document to another medical practice
  • Receive direct secure messages from other medical practices and add the information they contain to a patient’s chart
  • Allow your patient and families to send a visit summary directly from the patient portal to another medical practice using a direct secure message

Patient Portal Messages vs. Direct Secure Messaging: The patient portal and PCC EHR support two different messaging technologies. Portal messages are a secure, optional messaging tool built into the patient portal. Patient portal users can exchange messages with their pediatric practice, and the practice can receive and send portal messages with PCC EHR or pocketPCC. Direct Secure Messaging, on the other hand, is a specialized message technology used to share and send medical information. It requires registration with a third-party service and it allows for secure transmission of C-CDA transition of care documents or visit summaries. For more information, refer to Receive and Respond to Portal Messages or Direct Secure Messaging.

Activate Direct Secure Messaging For Your Practice

When you are ready to activate Direct Secure Messaging for your practice, contact PCC Support. We will create your practice’s Direct Secure Messaging connection. PCC partners with Updox to manage the back-end of the service.

Create Direct Secure Messaging Accounts for Users

After Direct Secure Messaging is turned on for your practice, create a Direct Secure Messaging account for any user who needs to be able to send and receive direct secure messages.

Open User Administration

Open the User Administration tool from the Tools menu in PCC EHR.

Create a Direct Secure Messaging Account

Edit the user’s account, click on the “Direct Secure Messaging” tab, and create a Direct Secure Messaging account.


Who Needs a Direct Secure Messaging Account?: Users only need a Direct Secure Messaging account in order to send and receive direct secure messages. Other operations, such as matching inbound messages to the right patients, reconciling the contents of inbound messages to patient charts, or deleting inbound messages, may be performed by any user who has the relevant role permissions in PCC EHR. No Direct Secure Messaging account is required to perform these actions.

View and Manage the User’s Direct Secure Message Account

After you create the account, you can see the user’s Direct Secure Messaging address as well as options to deactivate their account or set directory preferences.

Users Can Look Up Their Own Direct Secure Message Address

Users with Direct Secure Messaging accounts may look up their own addresses in the My Account tool under the File menu in PCC EHR.


Users can share their Direct Secure Messaging address with patients or other medical practices for the purpose of receiving transition of care documents.

Register Your Practice with the DirectTrust Network

Once your practice’s Direct Secure Messaging service is enabled, users with accounts can send direct secure messages to individuals in other organizations who also have a Direct Secure Messaging address.

As with an email address, if you know the Direct Secure Messaging address of another individual you can send them a message. If you do not know whether your recipient has a Direct Secure Messaging address or what their address is, you can search for them by name or organization in one of several directories.

Updox maintains a directory of individuals and organizations who use their Direct Secure Messaging service. From the moment your practice activates Direct Secure Messaging, users with accounts can search the directory for the Direct Secure Messaging addresses of other members.

Updox also offers the option to register for the DirectTrust Network. The DirectTrust Network grants access to a directory of Direct Secure Messaging addresses far beyond Updox’s network. Members of the DirectTrust Network can look up each others’ Direct Secure Messaging addresses.

In order to register with the DirectTrust Network, one Direct Secure Messaging user at your practice must undergo identity verification and register to serve as your practice’s legal representative. Only one Direct Secure Messaging user at your practice needs to complete the registration with the DirectTrust Network.

To register, the designated user opens the My Account tool in PCC EHR and clicks on the blue link below their Direct Secure Messaging address.

The link redirects to a registration form on Updox’s website.


The user completes the registration steps on the Updox website. They will need to enter identifying information and answer demographic questions to verify their identity.

Once the process is complete, you will see the result in the User Administration tool, or in the My Account tool.

Once one user on your system has registered your practice with the DirectTrust Network, all Direct Secure Message users will have access to the Direct Secure Messaging trust network.

What to Do When the Authorized Representative Leaves Your Practice: When you disable a user account in PCC EHR, it also disables their Direct Secure Messaging account. If you disable the account of your authorized representative, PCC EHR will send a message to Updox, the third-party vendor that manages Direct Secure Messaging accounts. Your practice will lose access to the DirectTrust Network until you register a new authorized representative. To register a new authorized representative, contact PCC Support with the name of the person you would like to designate.

Configure Users to Work with Inbound Messages

Users with the right role permissions can work with inbound direct secure messages in PCC EHR. These users do not need a Direct Secure Messaging account.

With the right role permissions, users in PCC EHR can match inbound messages to the correct patient, reconcile clinical data from inbound messages to patient charts, and, in exceptional cases, delete inbound messages. Each operation is controlled by a separate permission in the User Administration tool.

The Messaging Queue permission gives users access to the Messaging queue in PCC EHR, where they can match inbound messages to the correct patient. The Reconciliation permission gives users the ability to reconcile clinical data from inbound messages to patient charts. The Direct Secure Message Removal permission gives users the ability to delete inbound messages from the Messaging queue in PCC EHR. Deletion is an irreversible action that should only be taken under special circumstances, such as when you receive a message for a patient who does not belong to your practice.

You can add the above permissions to existing roles or create new roles dedicated to Direct Secure Messaging. To learn more about creating and assigning user roles in PCC EHR, read Set User Roles for Permissions and Security.

Send a Direct Secure Message with a Summary of Care Record

You can use Direct Secure Messaging to send a message and a Summary of Care Record to a specialist for a referral or to another clinician as part of a transition of care.

For more information, read the Send and Receive Direct Secure Messages help article.

Receive a Direct Secure Message and Add It to a Patient’s Chart

To learn how to receive a Direct Secure Message in PCC EHR, as well as how to add it to a patient’s chart, work with the message and import medical data, read Send and Receive Direct Secure Messages.

Customize Your Practice’s Direct Secure Message Protocol

When you work with Direct Secure Messages in PCC EHR, you can use a custom protocol that includes components that will help you respond to the information in the message and take action.

Your practice can customize the Direct Secure Message protocol in the Protocol Configuration tool. For example, you may want to add the patient’s Problem List, History, or Upcoming Appointments components to assist your workflow when you read and evaluate a Direct Secure Message.


For information about protocols in PCC EHR, you can read about Protocol Configuration.

Patients and Families Can Send Direct Secure Messages in MyKidsChart, the Patient Portal

Once your practice has activated Direct Secure Messaging, your patients and families can use the patient portal to send their own visit summary directly to other physicians and medical practices.

To learn more, read Send and Receive Direct Secure Messages.

PCC Community: The Home of PCCTalk

/in /by

PCC Community is an online forum and email listserv for users of PCC’s pediatric software. By connecting to PCC Community, you can join discussions about issues facing pediatric practices as well as PCC’s software and services.

You can access PCC Community and PCCTalk through a website or through your email inbox, accessing the information and community discussion you value in the format that works best for you.

Watch a Video: You can watch a complete video introduction to PCC Community and PCC Talk.

PCC Community has multiple categories, with PCCTalk being the main category for discussions among the practices that use PCC. We also have categories for PCC News and PCCTalk Archives (a collection of posts from our former platform).

This FAQ will help you get started with the PCC Community forum.

Frequently Asked Questions

  • How do I access PCCTalk and PCC Community?

    Visit https://community.pcc.com to login to PCC Community.

  • Can I use PCCTalk without logging into the PCC Community website?

    No problem! Once you are a member of PCC Community, you can send an email to: pcc+talk@discoursemail.com. When you create a new post or reply to a post someone else made, your message will post in the PCCTalk category of PCC Community.

  • How do I sign up to become a member?

    You can join the PCC Community and PCCTalk anytime by filling out the form at: https://www.pcc.com/talk/.

    2018 Accounts From PCCTalk to PCC Community: If you are a current PCCTalk member on May 7th, 2018, you will automatically receive an invitation from us to join PCC Community. If you sign up by May 6th, you will be included in our automatic invitation on May 7th. If you want to join PCC Community after that date, or you never received an automatic invite, simply fill out the online form and we’ll send you an invitation.

  • I signed up, now what? Respond to your invitation to join PCC Community!

    You’ll first receive an invitation email asking you to join PCC Community.

    Click the link in the email to open a Web browser where you can enter your new username and full name, and create a password. After you fill out the fields, click “Accept Invitation”.

    Important--Sign Up, and Confirm: Next, return to your email. You’ll get a second email message where you can confirm and activate your account. For your membership to be fully complete, you need to open the second email message from PCC Community and click the link to Confirm and Activate your new account. Once you do that, you’ll be taken to the PCC Community home page and can start exploring. (Note: if you fail to take action on the second email to confirm and activate your account, you will not be allowed to login again. When you accept the invitation in the first email, it allows you to access PCC Community right away, but that is the only instance of access allowed. Leaving and trying to access it a second time requires action on the second email).

  • How do I adjust my email settings and other user preferences?

    From the PCC Community home page, click on the circle with your initial (or profile image) in the upper-right corner of the screen. Then click on the “person” icon to see options for your account. Click on Preferences (with the ‘gear’ icon) to see account preferences.

    • Account Settings: The first screen you’re brought to is your Account screen. This is where you can send yourself a Password Reset email if you want to change your password. Scroll to the bottom and you’ll see where you can upload or change your Profile Picture. If you don’t want a profile picture, the image will just display with your first initial. Don’t forget to ‘Save Changes’ when you’re done.

    • Profile Settings: These settings are completely optional, but if you want you can add an ‘About me’, your ‘Location’ and the URL of your practice’s website. Click ‘Save Changes’ when you’re done.

    • Email Settings: By default, PCC Community is set up with Mailing List Mode enabled. That means you will receive an email per post for any posts made in the PCCTalk or PCC News Categories.


      Mailing list mode is a great way to ensure you get important PCC-specific news delivered right to your inbox. However, if you do not want an email for every new post, uncheck the box next to ‘Enable mailing list mode’. From there, go to the Activity Summary section above Mailing List mode, and check the box next to ‘When I don’t visit here, send me an email summary of popular topics and replies’. The default setting in the dropdown is daily, but you have many options for how often you’d like to receive an Activity Summary of posts.


      Click the dropdown menu to choose from: every 30 minutes, hourly, daily, every three days, weekly, or every two weeks. Note that you will only receive a digest if you do not visit the PCC Community website. If you visit the site, the time of your visit will reset, and you will receive another Activity Summary when the interval has elapsed.

      You cannot have Mailing List mode and Activity Summary mode both enabled at the same time (you cannot receive an email per post AND a digest of all posts). You must choose one or the other. If you want to use PCC Community primarily as a listserv, you’re all set – an email per post is the default and you do not need to adjust any settings. Make sure to click ‘Save Changes’ if you make any adjustments to settings here.

    • Notification Settings: This is where you can turn on desktop notifications, allow other users to send you personal messages, and more. For example, you could create an email notification whenever there is a new PCC News topic.

    • Categories Settings: A subtopic of the Notification Settings. You can do things like enter certain topics you want to track in specific categories.

    • Interface Settings: This is where you can customize how your PCC Community interface looks. The Default theme is a white background, but you can change it to ‘Dark’ in the dropdown if you want a black background. The default Home Page is Categories (and when we refer to the ‘Home Page throughout this guide, we are referring to the Categories page). If you want, you can choose Latest from the dropdown, and then your PCC Community homepage will show all the latest posts from all the categories combined. There are a few other settings under Other that you can enable or disable as you like. Don’t forget to save changes.

  • Can I Redirect PCC Community Messages to a Different Email Address?
    You may have signed up for PCC Community using your PCC email, but want to read messages and get notifications at a different address. Click on your profile initial or picture, select the person icon, and visit Preferences.

    From there, you can click on the wrench icon to change your email, or add other email addresses.

  • Can I Change My Emails So They Include the Whole Conversation?
    By default, PCC Community will send you all announcements and PCCTalk discussions. However, they only include the most recent reply in a conversation thread. If you would like to see the entire conversation thread, you can adjust your “Include previous replies…” setting in your Email preferences.

  • How do I navigate around the PCC Community website?
    At any time, you can click the PCC Logo in the upper-left of the screen to return to the main page of PCC Community. You can also use the “hamburger” menu just to the left of your profile in the upper-right corner of the screen to access Categories, Popular topics, and other sections.
  • Help me get oriented on the Home Page of PCC Community
    The default home page for PCC Community is the Categories page. On this page, you’ll see a Welcome Banner at the top, providing you with some quick tips on getting started. If you’re all set with the info in it, you can get rid of the banner by clicking the X on its upper right corner. This will streamline the look of your homepage. Important: once you get rid of the Welcome Banner you can’t get it back, so only close it if you are certain you don’t need future access to the information it provides.

    Currently, the Categories page has 3 categories: PCCTalk, PCC News, and PCCTalk Archives. You’ll see a description of each category below its title. Click on the title of any category to see all the posts in that category. The most current posts are at the top of each category.

    Also on the homepage, next to the red ‘Categories’ tab, you’ll see a ‘Latest’ tab. Clicking on that tab brings you to a collection of all posts from all categories, with the most recent posts at the top.

    You can also access a specific category by choosing from the drop-down menu to the left of the red ‘Categories’ tab.

  • How do I read posts from PCCTalk and PCC Community?

    If you receive PCC Community messages in mailing list mode, then each post will arrive in your email. If you instead subscribe to an Activity Summary, you’ll get periodic emails showing you recent topics.

    On the PCC Community website, you can click on a specific category (PCC Talk or PCC News) or on the ‘Latest’ tab to read posts. Click on any post to read the full conversation thread.

  • How do I create a new conversation on PCCTalk?

    Once you are a member of PCC Community, you can send an email to: pcc+talk@discoursemail.com. Your message will post in the PCCTalk category of PCC Community.

    Or, on the website, you can click “New Topic” in the upper-right corner of the screen to create a new post.

    After you click “New Topic”, you’ll see a message composition box where you can create your post. Create a title for your post. The default category is PCCTalk, which is the only category you can create posts for (the other categories are read-only), so there is no need to change it.

    As you type the body of your post, a preview of the post will appear in the right hand side of the composition box. That will show you exactly how your post will appear once you publish it. For example, if you wanted to include an emoji in your post by typing it out with words (:grin:), it would appear with the written words where you are typing, but the actual emoji would appear in the preview.

    Speaking of emojis, if you don’t want to type them yourself, you can click on the emoji button on the toolbar of the composition box and click on the emoji you want to add. Again, you will see it appear as text in your left hand composition screen, and as the actual emoji in the right hand preview screen. Once you’re done writing, click the blue “Create Topic” button to publish your post to the PCCTalk category.

    Mention a Specific Member: If you want to mention a specific member of the forum in your post (so that they’ll be notified that they were mentioned in a post), you can use the “@” symbol in front of their username. For example, you could say, “@Chip can you tell me the dates of the next UC?” Making a post that way would alert Chip that he was mentioned in a post, rather than making a post and waiting or hoping for him to see it. You can review your own direct-mention notifications by clicking on your profile, selecting the Preferences gear, and then clicking Notifications from the menu on the top of the screen. (Note: that same screen will also give you notifications about responses to posts and likes people gave you.)

  • How do I respond or reply to a conversation on PCCTalk?

    If you receive PCC Community messages in your email, you can reply to any message thread directly to join the conversation.

    On the PCC Community website, click on the post to open it and then click the blue ‘Reply’ button at the bottom of the thread. That will create a new reply to the thread as a whole. If there are multiple people in the conversation, you can also click on the gray ‘Reply’ at the bottom of a specific comment to reply to that person’s comment directly. A reply to a specific person will still be viewable to all users.

  • Can I bookmark important conversations or announcements for later?

    Want to easily access an interesting post later? You can bookmark an entire conversation thread by clicking the bookmark icon at the bottom menu of the thread (to the left of the blue ‘Reply’ button). Or, you can bookmark a specific comment in the thread by clicking the bookmark icon inside the comment box.

    To access your bookmarked items, click your profile photo and choose the bookmark icon from the dropdown menu that appears. A list of your bookmarked items will appear. Click ‘Remove Bookmark’ next to an individual item to delete it from the list.

    You can also let everyone know you ‘like’ a specific comment, or an entire thread, by clicking the heart icon under a comment or a conversation thread.

  • How do I send a direct message to other PCC Community members?

    You can send a direct, private message to another user that will not be visible to other users. There are three ways to do this. The easiest is to click on your profile and choose the ‘mail’ icon from the dropdown menu. That will take you to a screen where you can see any messages people have sent you directly. Click the blue ‘New Message’ button to compose a private message to another member.

    Or you can click your profile photo, choose the Preferences gear, and then choose the Messages tab from the menu on the top of the screen. This brings you to your inbox, where you can compose a new direct message, and see a list of current messages people sent to you, as well as your sent messages and archived messages.

    Another way to access the direct message functionality is from the “hamburger” menu on upper right of the screen next to your profile photo. Choose ‘Users’, and then search for the member you want by scrolling or typing into the search bar. Click the name of the user you want and then click the blue ‘Message’ button.

  • Can I access PCC Community on-the-go?

    Yes you can! The PCC Community forum is optimized for mobile viewing, so you’ll find it easy to interact with the platform on a mobile device. Access it the same way you would on a desktop, by going to https://community.pcc.com and entering your username and password. There is a password reset link on the login screen in case you forget or need to reset your password.

  • Can I see the most popular posts?

    Yes, it’s easy to find the most popular topics. From the top-right “hamburger” menu (next to your profile photo), click ‘Top’. That brings you to a list of the top topics from all categories combined. The default setting is for the Year, but click the drop-down menu next to the date range to choose other views such as: Today, Week, Month, or Quarter. Viewing top topics is a great way to catch up on information you may have missed.

    New for 2018: The top topics will be reset in May of 2018, when PCCTalk is moving to the new PCC Community website.

Still have questions or need help?

We’re here for you! Contact pccmarketing@pcc.com with any questions.

Create and Edit Phone Notes in pocketPCC

/in /by

You can use pocketPCC on your mobile device or Web browser to create and edit phone notes in PCC EHR, along with tasks assigned to users. Back in PCC EHR, nurses and other users can pick up and respond to Phone Note tasks on the Messaging queue, as they would any phone note.

Create a Phone Note

To create a phone note in a patient’s chart, select ‘Add Phone Note’ from the chart menu.

Here you can add a phone note just as you would in PCC EHR.

Press the Save button to save your phone note. PCC EHR will add it to the patient’s record and return you to the patient’s Medical Summary.

Add a Task: If you want to follow up on an issue, ask your staff to schedule an appointment, or perform another action, fill out the task information in the Tasks section. The first, blank task appears automatically.

Tasks are Optional: If you have completed everything necessary for the phone note, you can leave the task blank and the phone note will be added to the patient’s Visit History with no task.

Multiple Tasks: You can press the Add Task button to create additional tasks. For example, you may need to have a nurse call the family back to schedule an appointment, but you may also want to call in a prescription for a patient or prompt another person at your practice to perform a task. Press the Add Task button for each new task.

More Information in PCC EHR: The Phone Note protocol in PCC EHR may display more information and other components than pocketPCC. The pocketPCC “Add Phone Note” tool does not display all possible components, and your practice may add additional components to the Phone Note protocol in PCC EHR.

Review and Edit Phone Notes

To review a phone note, select ‘Visit History’ from the chart menu.


You will see all chart notes, phone notes, portal messages and other encounters associated with the patient. If you want to see only phone notes, you can filter the history using the gear button.

Select the phone note you want to review, and click the Edit button to make changes or add tasks.



Changes will not be saved unless you click ‘Save’ at the bottom of the page.

Get Started in pocketPCC

/in /by

With pocketPCC, you can use any web browser or mobile device to review your daily schedule, look at a patient’s medical summary or demographic information, and create phone notes.

Read the procedure below to log in and get started.

Is Your pocketPCC Account Ready?

Before you can log in to pocketPCC, your practice’s user administrator must grant you a user role that includes pocketPCC access.

Next, you must open the My Account tool from the File menu in PCC EHR and set a security question.


If you do not see the pocketPCC security question fields, then your account does not yet have access to pocketPCC. For more information, read the Configure pocketPCC User Accounts help article.

Password Security Requirements: If you haven’t changed your password in a while, you may need to pick a new password that meets PCC EHR’s password security requirements. Common passwords (like “password”, “1234” or the user’s username or real name) are not allowed, and passwords must be at least 8 characters.

Visit Your Practice’s pocketPCC Address

Enter your practice’s pocketPCC address into a browser on your computer or your mobile device. Contact your office’s system administrator or PCC Support if you do not know your address. Typically, your pocketPCC login address will be your practice’s acronym (ACRO) followed by pocketpcc, and it will always use the https secure protocol: “https://ACRO.pcc.com/pocketpcc”. In this example, our practice’s ACRO=bedrockpeds, so the url is “https://bedrockpeds.pcc.com/pocketpcc”. If you are not sure what your practice’s acronym is, contact PCC support.

Bookmark pocketPCC or Add it To Your Home Screen: You can add pocketPCC to your home screen, or bookmark the URL for quick access later. Follow these instructions to add pocketPCC to your home screen.

Log In

Enter your username and password on the login screen.

pocketpcc01

Your pocketPCC username and password are the same as your PCC EHR username and password.

First Time On This Device? Enter Your Security Question

If this is the first time you have logged in on this browser or device, you must answer your security question.

pocketpcc02

Two Month Security Check: pocketPCC will ask you to verify your security question every two months, on each device.

Private Browsing: Private or Incognito browsing mode prevents pocketPCC from retaining the answer to your security question.  If you typically use Private or Incognito browsing, you’ll need to answer your security question every time you log in.

Enable Cookies: PocketPCC uses cookies to keep you logged in. If you have trouble logging in, or find yourself being logged out frequently, ensure that your phone’s browser accepts cookies.

Start Using pocketPCC

Once you’ve logged into pocketPCC, pick a provider (such as yourself) to see the schedule.

pocketpcc03
pocketpcc04
pocketpcc05

pocketPCC Remembers You: Once you have selected the clinician you wish to see, such as yourself, pocketPCC will remember and display that clinician each time you log in on the same device. You can change it at any time.

Open a Chart

Select any patient to open their chart.

pocketpcc19
pocketpcc06

For more examples of what you can do in pocketPCC, check out the help articles below.

Log Out

Select “Sign Out” from the pocketPCC Menu to log out.

Automatic Sign Out: pocketPCC will automatically log you out after 15 minutes of inactivity.

Set Up and Configure pocketPCC User Accounts

/in /by

Follow the procedure below to set up pocketPCC user accounts at your practice.

Is pocketPCC Activated For Your Practice?

Contact PCC Support when you are ready to use pocketPCC at your practice. We’ll turn on the service on your system.

Set pocketPCC Session Timeout

When pocketPCC is enabled for your practice, you can configure how long an unused pocketPCC session will remain open.

Open the Practice Preferences window from PCC EHR’s Configuration menu.


Select one of the six timeout lengths and click save. When any user leaves pocketPCC unused for more than the selected period of time, it will automatically log out. Any action in pocketPCC, even scrolling or typing, will prevent a user from being logged out.

Give pocketPCC Permission to a User Role

In PCC EHR, all access permissions are controlled by user roles. To activate pocketPCC access for users at your practice, first grant the right to a user role, such as a physician or clinician role.

pocketpcc24
pocketpcc25
pocketpcc26

Optionally, Create a New Role: If you want more granular control of which users have pocketPCC access, you could create a new role that includes only pocketPCC access. Read the Set User Roles help article to learn more about user roles.

Review and Assign Role to Users

After you make pocketPCC access available to a user role, edit user accounts who should have access to pocketPCC and grant them that role. For example, you may need to assign the clinician role to each clinician at your practice.

On the Users tab of the User Administration tool, open the user and visit their Settings tab.

pocketpcc27
pocketpcc28

Click on the user role that grants them pocketPCC access. If you have created a “pocketPCC” role, you can grant each appropriate user that role.

Create a Security Question

Before they can log in to pocketPCC, each pocketPCC user must create a security question.

Each user can open the My Account tool from the Tools menu.


Next, they can use the pull-down menu to define their security question and answer.

How Will My Security Question Be Used?: pocketPCC will ask the user the security question the first time they log in to pocketPCC with a new device.

Password Security Requirements: If the user has not changed their password in a while, they may need to pick a new password that meets PCC EHR’s password security requirements. Common passwords (like “password”, “1234” or the user’s username or real name) are not allowed, and passwords must be at least 8 characters.

Log In to pocketPCC

After setting a security question, each user can log in to pocketPCC on a web browser or mobile device and get started!

For more information, read the Get Started in pocketPCC help article.

Take a Screenshot

/in /by

Follow the instructions below to create a screenshot.

Use this guide if you need to quickly share an image of a PCC product or service with a PCC Support member.

Avoid Capturing PHI: When you are trying to illustrate something you are seeing on your screen, be careful not to include any patient identifiers (such as names, dates of services, or ID numbers) in your screenshot.

Windows 7 Screenshots

Open the Snipping Tool

Click on the Start button and type “Snip” into the search box. Then click “Snipping Tool”.

Snip an Image

Click and drag to select a portion of your screen. You can also click “New” and click and drag to take another screenshot.

Share

After you snip an image, you can immediately paste that image into an e-mail or another program. Click on the File menu and select Paste.

You can also click the floppy disk icon, “Save Snip”, and follow the onscreen instructions to save the image as a file on your computer. Then you can attach that image to an e-mail or transfer it another program.

Macintosh OSX Screenshots

Press command-shift-4

Hold down the command key and the shift key, and then press 4. (On some keyboards, the command key contains a square squiggle or an apple symbol.)

Select Your Screenshot

Click and drag the area you wish to capture.

Share

Your image will be saved to your desktop. You can open it in preview or an image editor program, or attach it to an e-mail.

Note: In addition to command-shift-4, you can also press command-shift-3 to capture the entire screen.

Linux Terminal Workstations (Gnome, KDE, Most Other Linux Operating Systems)

Select Your Window

Click to select the window that you wish to capture.

Press Alt-Print Screen

On your keyboard, hold down the Alt key and press the Print Screen key. On some keyboards, the Alt key may be the option key, and the Print Screen key may read “PrtScn” or similar.

Choose Where to Save the Image

Use the dialog box to choose where to save the file.

Share

Linux will save your image. You can open it in an image editor program or attach it to an e-mail.

iOS Device (iPhone, iPad)

Hold Home and Press Sleep/Wake

Press and hold the home button and then immediately press your device’s Sleep/Wake button.

Note: The Home button is a central button on the front of your device, the Sleep/Wake button is on the top of the device.

Wait for Click Sound or Flash

After one second, the iOS will capture a screenshot. It will indicate the image was taken with a click sound or a flash. You can release the two buttons.

Share

iOS saves your image into the Camera Roll on your device, inside the Photos app. You can open the Photos app and share the image, composing a new e-mail message or posting it somewhere else.

Android Device

Screenshots for an Android smart phone do not all work in the same way. Here are the instructions for a 2012 or later Android 4.0 phone.

Hold Volume Down and Press Power

Press and hold the Volume Down button and then immediately press your device’s Power button.

Note: The Home button is a central button on the front of your device, the Sleep/Wake button is on the top of the device.

Wait for Screen Flash

Within a couple seconds, the screen will flash and you can release the buttons.

Share

Android saves your image into the Gallery on your device. You can open the Gallery and share the image, composing a new e-mail message or posting it somewhere else.

Set User Roles for Permissions and Security

/in /by

You can use the User Administration tool to define permissions for the PCC EHR users at your practice. First, run the User Administration tool to define user roles. Then, assign one or more roles to each user account. Read below to learn more.

All Permissions: For a complete reference to all available Permission settings in a Role, jump to the Permissions Reference below.

Open the User Administration Tool

To get started, run User Administration from the “Tools” menu.

Review Who Has Each User Role

You can see which users have each role on the Users tab of the User Administration tool.

Users can have more than one role. They will have all permissions designated by each of their roles.

Disabled Users: Even disabled users, such as those who have left your practice, may have roles assigned. If you wish to delete an unneeded role, open those old user accounts and remove the role.

Define or Edit User Roles

Click on the Roles tab to review and edit your practice’s list of user roles.

You can see the description of each role and the number of users assigned that role.

Double-click on a role to review what permissions it includes or change the name.

You can evaluate and design user roles that work with your practice’s needs. Keep in mind that users can have more than one role, so you can design around access needs as well as job title. You might have a Office Administration role with permissions for all functions, and a Physician role that grants access to just those features a physician would need, for example.

See the Permissions Reference below to learn more about the different permissions available.

Delete Unneeded Roles: After updating and consolidating the different permissions in each role, you may find you no longer need a role. You can delete any role that has no assigned users.

Assign Roles to Users

When you want to assign or remove a role from a user, open the User Administration tool and double-click on the user.


Next, click on the Role Assignment tab and select one or more user roles.

The gray window below the pull-down menu will display the permissions the user will have based on the roles that you select.

User roles make it easy to assign a set of permissions to a new user, or redefine the role of each staff member at your practice. Additionally, user roles make other features in PCC EHR more powerful.

What About eRx Roles?

Prescriber and eRx administration tools are set inside each user’s account. They are not defined by a PCC EHR role. For more information, read the Set Up PCC eRx User Access article.

Permissions Reference

Read the descriptions below to learn about each of the account role permissions in PCC EHR. To grant a user any of the permissions listed below, first add it to a user role. Then, assign that role to a user.

Changes at Login: Remember that any changes to user settings take place the next time that a user logs in. If you disable an account or grant access to a tool, your changes will not take effect immediately if the user is logged in when you make the change.

Appointment Book

Practices who use the Appointment Book with PCC EHR will see these permissions.

Users with the Appointment Book permission may open the Appointment Book from the PCC File menu and schedule appointments for providers.

  • Blocks: Users with blocking permission can add blocks to a provider’s schedule to indicate that they should not have any appointments scheduled during that period of time.

  • Force Appointment: Users with permission to force appointments are able to overbook the schedule, and may also override another user’s hold on a time slot.

  • Provider Hours: Users with Provider Hours permission may use the Provider Hours tool to configure and assign templates to each provider’s calendar, including optional color-coded visit type guidance.

  • Visit Reason Editor: Users with this permission may use the Visit Reason Editor to create and work with visit reasons, set visit reason durations by provider, and select the practice’s default visit reason.

Auto-Notes Configuration

PCC EHR can automatically fill out notes for radio line selections. For example, when you check “Normal” for items in a Physical Exam, PCC EHR can pop-in your personal notes for what “Normal” means for you in the notes field. The Auto-Notes configuration permission determines whether or not a user may edit Auto-Notes.

  • (basic user access): By default, all users can configure their own Auto-Notes, either by right-clicking on a note or by opening the Auto-Notes Configuration tool in the Tools menu.

  • Practice Defaults Configuration: Users with permission to edit the practice defaults can select the “Practice” user inside the Auto-Notes Configuration tool and enter the Auto-Notes for the practice.

  • Configuration of All Users: Users with “All Users” permission may run the Auto-Notes Configuration tool and review and edit Auto-Notes for any user. If a provider asked an assistant to type up all of their charting notes, that assistant would need this permission.

Billing Configuration

Users with the Billing Configuration permission may open the Billing Configuration tool. In that tool, they can customize which procedure billing codes are triggered by each order, define which ICD-10 billing code will be used by default for each SNOMED-CT diagnosis description, and what diagnoses and procedures will appear for easy selection on the Bill screen in PCC EHR.

Read the Configure Procedure and Diagnoses Billing help article to learn more.

Bills

Users with the Bills permission may open the Bills tool, generate personal bills, review the log of bill runs, review the contents of any bill, and change your practice’s custom messages that appear on bills. Read Generate Personal Bills to learn more.

C-CDA Batch Export Tool

Users with this permission can export large batches of patient data from PCC EHR using the C-CDA Batch Export Tool.

Charted Visit Deletion

Users with the Charted Visit Deletion permission may delete charted visits (after the appointment has been canceled or deleted). To learn how, read the Delete a Visit from a Patient’s Chart article.

Chart Export

Users with the Chart Export permission may export a patient’s whole chart in just a few clicks. Learn how.

Stop and Think Before You Assign: The patient chart export exposes all of the Protected Health Information (PHI) stored in your system for a particular patient. This information is protected by law and sharing it inappropriately may harm the patient, their caregivers, you, and your practice. Before you update a role with the chart export permission, consider whether this permission is appropriate for all users with that role.

Claims

Users with the Claims permission may open the Claims tool, process and submit claims, view the list of claims that can not be submitted and need a correction, and view the logs of all claim submissions including which claims were delayed, held, or routed to paper for printing.

Claim Holds

Users with the Claim Holds permission may visit the Claim Holds tab of the Claims tool and define criteria that will prevent claims from being submitted.

Delay

Users with the Delay permission may visit the Claim Delay tab of the Claims tool and define how many days after the date of service claims will be blocked from being processed and submitted.

Clinical Alerts Editor

Users with the Clinical Alerts Editor permission may open the Clinical Alerts tool and define PCC EHR alerts. Clinical Alerts include alerts for scheduling, billing, and other functions, not just those of a clinical nature.

Combine Accounts and Patients

Users with Combine Accounts and Patients permission can combine two duplicate patients, or two duplicate accounts into a single patient or single account. Merging two patients or two accounts permanently combines all available data and cannot be undone.

Read the Merge Duplicate Patients and Accounts help article to learn more.

Diagnosis Configuration

Users with the Diagnosis Configuration permission may access the Diagnosis Configuration tool in the Tools menu.

They can use that tool to edit the practice’s list of Allergy and Favorite diagnosis from the master list of SNOMED-CT descriptions, as well as map the descriptions to an appropriate ICD-9 (before October 2014) or ICD-10 (after October 2014) billing code. You can also use the Diagnosis Configuration tool to determine which diagnoses should be hidden or “locked” by default, and to retroactively hide all instances of a diagnosis in all chart history.

Read the Diagnosis Configuration help article to learn more.

Direct Secure Message Removal

Users with the Direct Secure Message Removal permission may delete incoming Direct Secure Messages. Read the Direct Secure Messaging help article to learn more.

Document Administration

Users with the Document Administration permission may open the Document Administration Tool in the Tools menu. They may then add, edit, or delete document categories, configure document file sources, and set a default document category for saved Patient Education handouts.

Only users who need to change the way that PCC EHR stores and categorizes documents should have this permission.

For more information, read the Document and Scanning Configuration help article.

E-lab Results Queue and Deletion

Users with the E-Lab Results queue permission will have an additional queue in PCC EHR, “E-Lab Results” which they can use to review incoming e-lab results and then place them in a patient’s chart. Optionally, users may have the E-Lab Result Deletion permission. Those users can handle special circumstances where a result can not be placed in a chart and should be destroyed.

For more information, read the Import E-lab Test Results help article.

E-lab Result Unlinking

Users with the E-Lab Results Unlinking permission may access the Unlink E-labs tool in the Tools menu in PCC EHR. The Unlink E-labs tool allows users to unlink e-lab results attached to the wrong patient or encounter and return them to the E-lab Results Queue.

For more information, read the Unlink E-lab Results from a Patient or Encounter.

Electronic Remittance Advice

Users with the Electronic Remittance Advice permission may open the Electronic Remittance Advice tool in PCC EHR and view responses to claims from payers. Read Read ERA 835s From Payors to learn more.

Process and Delete ERA Files

Users with the Process and Delete ERA Files permission may open the Electronic Remittance Advice and process incoming adjudications from payors and delete an ERA sent to your practice in error. Read Read ERA 835s From Payors and Post Insurance Payments to learn more.

Emergency Access

Users with the Emergency Access permission may turn on Emergency Access, an item in the File menu, which grants access to all PCC EHR features and security levels.

Forms Configuration, Delete Form, and Signature Image Configuration

The Forms Configuration, Delete Form, and Signature Image Configuration permissions appear in User Administration as soon as the Forms tool is enabled, either in Configuration Mode or live. Users with the Forms Configuration permission may access the Forms Configuration tool in PCC EHR and create, manage, and edit forms therein.

The Delete Form permission is an extra layer on top of Forms Configuration that allows users to delete forms from the Forms Configuration tool, and therefore your PCC system.

The Signature Image Configuration permission is another layer that allows users to upload, delete, and manage permissions of provider signatures used on forms generated in PCC EHR.

For more information about what users can do with the Forms Configuration, Delete Forms, and Signature Image Configuration permissions, read Create and Manage Forms in PCC EHR.

Growth Chart Configuration

Users with the Growth Chart Configuration permission may open the Growth Chart Configuration tool and make changes to which growth charts appear in PCC EHR.

For more information, read the Configure Growth Charts help article.

Immunization Configuration

Users with the Immunization Configuration permission may open the Immunization Configuration tool and configure the order of immunizations and which immunizations appear by default on the patient’s Immunization History chart section.

Immunization Registry Response Viewer

Users with permission to access the Immunization Registry Response Viewer may review acknowledgement responses from the immunization registry, highlighting warnings and errors that may need to be fixed. For more information, read the Immunization Registry Response Viewer article.

Insurance Payments

Users with the Insurance Payments permission may open the Insurance Payments tool and manually post insurance payments and adjustments, adjust expected copay amounts, and queue up claims for the next responsible party.

Lab Configuration

Users with the Lab Configuration permission may open the Lab Configuration tool and configure labs for your practice.

Patient Lists

Users with the Patient Lists permission can open the Patient Lists reporting tool and create customizable lists of patients.

Patient Portal Administration

Users with the Patient Portal Administration permission can open the Portal Portal Manager and use the Administration tab to manage family accounts that have access to patient account information.

Read the Patient Portal User Account Administration article to learn more.

Patient Portal Configuration

Users with the Patient Portal Configuration permission can open the Portal Portal Manager and use the Configuration tab to change what appears in the practice’s patient portal, set the default emancipation age for patient privacy, and enable or disable the messaging feature.

Read the Patient Portal Configuration article to learn more.

Patient Portal Message Deletion

Users with the Patient Portal Message Deletion permission can delete incoming messages from the patient portal. Read the Receive and Respond to Portal Messages help article to learn more.

Patient Reminders

Users with the Patient Reminders permission can open the Patient Reminders reporting tool and create custom lists of patients and export them for mail merge reminders.

Patient Visit Summary Configuration

Users who have this permission are allowed to run the Patient Visit Summary Configuration tool. They can select which information will appear on the Patient Visit Summary Report by default, including office contact information and which patient chart sections to include. Settings will apply to all visit summaries generated within the practice.

Payments Tool

Users with the Payments Tool permission may open the Payments tool, post personal payments to an account, write-off credits, reverse payments, view an account’s payment history, and perform other payment-related functions.

PCC EHR Audit Log

Users with permission to access the PCC EHR Audit Log may see a detailed record of everything that has happened with a patient’s chart, including everyone who has viewed the chart and what components they have accessed. For more information, read the PCC EHR Audit Log article.

Chat Message Log

Users with permission to access the Chat Message Log, a tab within the PCC EHR Audit Log, can review all PCC EHR Chat messages in order to investigate practice policy violations.

Phone Encounter Performance

Users with the Phone Encounter Performance permission can run the Phone Encounter Performance report.

Phone Note Deletion

Users with the Phone Note Deletion permission have the ability to delete faulty phone notes.

pocketPCC Access

Users with the pocketPCC Access permission can log in to pocketPCC and access PCC functions from a web browser or mobile device. After granting a user a role that includes pocketPCC access, the user must set a security question in the My Account tool before they can log in.

Post Charges

Users with the Post Charges permission can click “Ready to Post” or “New Items” from the Schedule screen in order to open the Post Charges tool. On the Post Charges ribbon, they can review and update encounter codes, add claim information, add payments, print a receipt, and queue up a claim.

Practice Management

Users with the Practice Management permission may select the Practice Management window from the PCC File menu. At present, this provides access to under-the-hood billing, collections, and configuration tools in PCC’s Partner practice management suite.

Practice Preferences

Users with the Practice Preferences permission may open the Practice Preferences tool from the Tools menu. Practice Preferences include a wide variety of PCC EHR options, including automatic logout and columns on the Schedule queue.

Practice Vitals Dashboard

Users with permission to access the Practice Vitals Dashboard may review the practice’s financial and clinical health based on national and regional pediatric benchmarks. For more information, read the Login and Review Your Practice Vitals Dashboard article.

Print Visit Forms

Users with the Print Visit Forms permission can open the Print Visit Forms tool, which is used to generate a batch of forms used for a day’s encounters.

Professional Contact Manager

Users with the Professional Contact Manager permission may open the Professional Contact Manager tool. They can then manage the list of your practice’s professional contacts, school medical personnel, and other providers who may be part of patient care plans.

Protocol Configuration

Users with the Protocol Configuration permission may open the Protocol Configuration Tool. They can then use the Protocol Builder, Component Builder, and Protocol Map to change the charting experience of every user in the practice.

Only users who will be helping your office design their chart notes should have Protocol Configuration permission.

Queues

Users with each of the “Queues” permissions will see those queues visible when they log into PCC EHR. This includes the daily schedule in PCC EHR (also called the Schedule screen), along with queues for e-lab results, messaging, prescriptions, signing, and visit tasks.

The queues are listed in alphabetical order. If a user has multiple roles assigned in the User Administration tool, they will see all queues available to any of their roles.

Reconciliation

Users with Reconciliation permission may view and import data to patient files from transition of care documents received in C-CDA format through Direct Secure Messaging.

Report Library

Users with permission to access the Report Library may view reports, customize reports, delete scheduled reports, manage Report Library categories, and send Broadcast Messages. For more information about running reports, read PCC EHR Report Library. To learn about sending Broadcast Messages to all contacts on a patient list, read Batch Messaging Through PCC EHR’s Report Library.

User roles with the Manage Categories permission control access to which roles can see specific reporting categories.

To restrict or grant access to a category, click on the “Manage Categories” button in the Report Library, then edit the category and check or uncheck a user role.


For more information about restricting access to reports in the Report Library, read Restrict Access to Reports in the Report Library.

Signing

Users with Signing permission may sign charts, documents, and other items. They may click “Sign” at the bottom of an open chart note or within an order, or they may use the Signing queue in PCC EHR.

Only providers who need to sign charts and other items should be granted this permission.

Requires Co-Signer (visits and phone notes)

Users with the Requires Co-Signer item can sign charts, but they must then indicate which physician will co-sign their work.

Only providers who need a supervising physician to review and sign their chart notes should be given this selection.

The Requires Co-Signing permission will not appear unless your practice has enabled co-signing in the Practice Preferences.

Snap Text Configuration

Users with the Snap Text Configuration permission may set up and adjust system-wide snap text for use by all PCC users at the practice.

Summary of Care Record Configuration

Users who have this permission are allowed to run the Summary of Care Record Configuration tool. They can select which sections of the C-CDA to include on the Summary of Care Record Report. Settings will apply to all EHR users within the practice.

User Administration Tool

Users who have the User Administration Tool permission are allowed to run the User Administration Tool. They can add or disable PCC EHR users, change any user’s password, and define the rights of other users. They can also define PCC eRx prescriber roles and permissions and configure a user’s Direct Secure Messaging options.

You should only grant this permission to a few users at your practice. Note that PCC has this permission so that PCC Support can help you administer your user accounts.

For more information, read the Change Passwords and Other User Settings article.

Visit Status Configuration

Users with the Visit Status Configuration permission may open the Visit Status Configuration Tool. They can then edit the names and colors of pre-configured visit statuses that appear on the schedule screen, or create custom statuses for your practice.

Find and Open a Patient Chart

/in /by

The sections below describe the many tools for finding and opening a chart, once you have logged in to PCC EHR.

Open a Chart, Overview

Select a Patient From the Appointment List

Use the Schedule screen to find a patient you wish to review. You can use the calendar to pick a different day and use the Provider or Location drop-down menus to limit which appointments appear.

You can also find a patient on the Visit Tasks, Phone Tasks, or Signing Queue and then click “Open Chart”.

Alternative: Open a Recently Opened Chart

If you have opened a chart previously, you can start typing or use the pull-down arrow in the Find field to open a recently opened chart.


Alternative: Search for a Patient

You can find a patient by entering part of their name, their phone number, or their birthdate in the search box. Then press Enter or click “Find”.


Search Tips: You can enter a patient’s date of birth with either a 2-digit or 4-digit year (01/15/99 or 01/15/1999), and you can include slashes (/) or not (01151999). For phone numbers, enter seven or ten digits with any formatting (800-722-1082, or 8007221082). You can also search by patient PCC number by preceding a number with “pcc” or “patient”. For more information, read Search for Patients and Accounts in PCC EHR.

Double-Click on Patient Name or Select and Click “Open”

To open a chart, either double-click on the patient’s name or select them and click the “Open” button at the bottom of the screen.

Review Chart

Use the navigation buttons on the left-hand side of the screen to review sections of the chart or chart a visit.

Tips for Searching for a Patient

You can search for charts by name, birth date, phone number, patient PCC number, or any of the custom patient fields that your practice has assigned a search key word.

To learn about all the different search options, read Search for Patients and Accounts in PCC EHR.

Concurrent Access: Can Two People Read a Chart at the Same Time?

Different users can access and add information to a patient’s chart at the same time. However, a single user can not open the same chart twice at the same time.

If you log into PCC EHR on two different computers and attempt to open the same chart a second time, PCC EHR will prompt you to save your changes and close the chart elsewhere, discard any changes, or cancel and leave the chart open on your other login or screen.

Remove or Delete a Document

/in /by

You may scan a document by mistake, or scan it twice. You might also add a document to a chart by mistake. Sometimes, you may need to rescan a document or throw away a document that was scanned in error.

Follow the instructions below to remove a document from a chart or from the Import Documents queue.

Remove a Document from a Patient’s Chart

Click on any document in a patient’s Documents screen, click “Edit”, and then click “Remove Document”.  A new window will appear prompting you to select a file source for the removed document.



After you remove a document, it will return to the file source you selected, in the Import Documents screen.

Remove a Document from the Import Documents Screen

If you wish to completely remove a document, open the Import Documents screen select the document from the list, and click “Remove Document”.


Recover Removed Images

After you remove an image, it is kept on your PCC server for a period of time, in case it was removed in error.

Contact PCC Support to recover a removed image.

You can customize how long removed images are kept on your server. The default time is 30 days. After the safety backup time has passed, the file is permanently deleted from your PCC server. Contact PCC Support to change how long removed images are stored.

Note: If a scanned document has ever been attached to a patient’s chart, it will remain a part of your system’s permanent record and will not be deleted. Even after you remove it from the patient’s chart and from the import queue, your system will maintain a copy for chart auditing purposes.

Review Documents for a Patient

/in /by

You can review patient documents in several different ways.

Review Documents in the Documents Section of the Patient’s Chart

Navigate to the Documents section of a patient chart from the History button. Here you can see a list of all patient documents, organized by category and sorted by date.

Visit the Working with Documents help article to learn more about the Documents section of the patient chart.

Access Recent Documents Quickly

The Documents section of the patient’s chart includes a “Recent Documents” list, which displays the five most recent documents in a patient’s chart.

You can quickly find the most recently imported or modified documents in the patient’s chart. When you are hunting for a lab result, or attaching the latest handout to a patient portal message, you can grab the document you need without having to browse the categories. The Recent Documents list is also available when you attach a document as an attachment to a portal message.

Review Documents From the Patient’s Encounter History

While reviewing a patient’s Visit History screen, you may open any documents associated with a visit.

You may also see unattached documents filed for a specific date.

Review Documents on the Signing Queue

If a document requires a signature, you can review and sign it from the Signing queue.


Alternatively, if a document is attached to another item that needs to be signed (such as a visit, order, or phone note), you can review the document from the signing queue while signing the other item.

Review Documents on the Messaging Queue

If a document includes a task, you can review it and work on the task(s) from the Messaging queue.


Update PCC EHR on Your Computer

/in /by

If the PCC EHR client software on your PC, Macintosh, or Linux device is not up to date, the login window will tell you. Click “Ok” to download and begin the update.

The installer will launch automatically. The installer looks different on different computers, but in each case you can simply click “Next” or “Continue” to step through the process.

The Windows setup application looks like this:

The Macintosh setup application looks like this:

Manual Updates

You can also perform a manual update by downloading the PCC EHR Client. Open a Web browser and visit your server’s PCC downloads page. It gives you direct access to important PCC downloads, as well as links to PCC support and our online documentation at learn.pcc.com.

The url is simply your PCC acronym followed by pcc.com/downloads. So, if your acronym was ABCD, your downloads page would be at https://ABCD.pcc.com/downloads

In-Office Link: This link will work when your computer or workstation is connected to your office’s PCC network. If you use a third-party to manage your network, or need to connect to PCC EHR from a home office, contact your Client Advocate for download assistance.

Read Install and Configure PCC EHR on a New Computer to learn more.

Emergency Access Mode

/in /by

PCC EHR has an Emergency Access mode which allows specified users to have access to features that would otherwise be locked. You can set who should have Emergency Access permission by granting the permission to any user role in the User Administration tool.

Any user with that role will be able to override their normal user permissions by using the “Emergency Access” option under the File menu.



While in Emergency Access mode, the user will have access to all PCC EHR settings and permissions. All activity will be logged.

Import and Attach a Document to a Patient’s Chart

/in /by

After you have scanned or printed a file into PCC EHR, you can use the Import Documents screen to review the document and place it into a patient’s chart.

Along the way, you can title and tag the document, create tasks for later, attach the document to a specific visit, and even make it available to the patient families in the patient portal.

Open the Import Documents Tool

From any screen in PCC EHR, click on the Import Documents icon at the bottom of your EHR window.


Or select “Import Documents” from the File menu.

Optional: Set Which File Sources Appear For You

PCC EHR sends scanned documents and files to one or more “buckets”, or file sources. You can use the file source drop-down to set which buckets will appear for you.

For example, if you regularly work with Lab results and your office has a Lab scanner, you should add the Lab file source to your list.

Select One Document or Multiple Documents

Click on a document you wish to link to a patient. If there are multiple pages for a single document, hold the Shift key in order to select all pages.

By default, documents appear in reverse-chronological order, so a document you just scanned will appear at the top. You can also sort by file name.

Can't Find My Document?: If your Import Documents window has been open for a long time, you may not see the most recently scanned files. You can refresh the list of scanned documents at any time by clicking “Load New Files”.


You might also need to check other file sources in the File Source menu, as described in the optional step above.

Review the Document in the Central Panel

While sorting through multiple documents, you can review a document’s content in the Preview panel.

Optionally Split a Scanned File into Pages

If a single scanned document should be broken into multiple files, click “Split File”. You can then give each page of a document a different category, and/or attach it to different encounters or orders.


After you click Split File, small files will split quickly. Large scans of dozens or hundreds of pages may take several seconds or minutes to divide into single pages.

Find a Patient

Use the Find field to find a patient. Double click on the patient to select them.


You may search by patient name, date of birth, or use any of your office’s custom search keys as described in the Open a Chart help article.

Open Recent Patient, One-Click 'Last Patient': Click on the patient find field’s drop-down menu to pick from any of the last ten patients you worked with. You can also click “Last Patient”, which can save time when you are importing a series of scanned documents to the same patient’s chart.

Add a Title, Select a Category, and Attach the Document to an Encounter

After you select a patient, enter a title and then choose a document category. To associate a document with an encounter (a visit, phone note, or portal message) or a care plan, select it from the drop-down menu. If you select an encounter with orders, you can optionally attach the document to a specific order within that encounter.


Click “File as Unattached Document” to simply import the document to the chart. You can then optionally enter a date for the document and indicate whether or not the document should appear in the Visit History Index for the patient.

Default: When you choose to file a document as unattached, PCC EHR assumes that you wish to add the document to the patient’s Documents section, but not to the Visit History. If you wish it to appear in the visit history, enter a date.

Categories: If you wish to edit the document categories your office uses, read Edit Document Categories.

Optional: Require Clinician Signature, Enter Notes, Share in My Kids Chart

At the bottom of the panel, you can indicate whether the document needs to be signed by a clinician and enter notes. Documents that require a signature will appear on the Signing queue.

Who is the PCP?: When choosing which pediatrician should review the document, you can click the Patient Information button to see the patient’s PCP.

Share in My Kids Chart: To share with My Kid’s Chart users, click the box to make the document available in the patient portal.

Optional: Create a Document Task

For each document you can add new tasks, select who the task is for, and add a note. You can add more than one task if many different users need to respond to the content of a document.

Click Save

Click the “Save” button at the bottom of the screen to finish importing the document.

Patient Lists

/in /by

PCC EHR can create lists of patients based on complex criteria. You can save those criteria as special reports that you can re-run at any time.

Your office can create unique Patient Lists that help you review and work with your patient population, such as:

  • All Chronic Patients
  • Spanish Speaking Patients
  • Patients with a Positive Rapid Strep Test (Within the Past 6 Months)
  • Patients with Weight Under the 5th Percentile

Permissions: Only specified users may access the Patient Lists report tool. If you do not have access, contact your practice’s PCC EHR system administrator or PCC Support.

View and Output a Patient List

Click on the Reports menu and select Patient Lists to open the Patient Lists reporting tool.


Make Changes: Click “Add” to add a new list from scratch. Select any list and click “Delete” to remove it or “Edit” to make changes.

Select any patient list and click “Generate List” to view the list.


  • While you review the list, you can click on any column header to sort the list by that column.
  • Use the “Criteria Column to Include” menu to add a criteria column to the report. In this way, you can sort your list by any of the criteria used to include patients.
  • Click “Save as File” to save the list to a file. You can then open the file in OpenOffice.org, Excel, or any other spreadsheet program.

Create or Edit a Patient List

Select a list and click “Edit” or click “Add” to open the Patient List Editor screen.


Basic List Settings

When creating or editing a patient list, you can configure the following items:

  • List Name: Enter or edit the list’s name.

  • Time Range for Criteria: Set the general time frame for all the criteria that apply to the list.

Criteria

The criteria section determines which patients will be included and excluded when you generate the patient list.

You can add criteria in a number of different categories.

Choose a category and then click “Add” or “Edit” to configure criteria. For example, if you wanted to include all patients with specific lab test results, you would add a Lab Test Results criteria.


As you enter the details for a new criteria, new blank lines will appear below for adding additional “OR” criteria in that section.

Demographics and Vitals: When you add a demographics or vitals criteria, the screen will prompt you to first select a specific criterion (age, height, etc) and then click Add to create criteria.


Selecting Patients Under a Percentile: For Vitals criteria, you can add values based on percentiles, such as patients under a certain percentile for weight or height.

Chronic, and Other Patient Flags: Does your office use Partner patient flags to classify patients with certain needs? You can use the Patient Flags criteria (found in the Demographics section) to identify patients who have, or do not have, certain flags.

Deceased Status: Use the Deceased patient status criteria to exclude deceased patients from the results. You can find it in the Demographics criteria section.

By mixing and matching criteria, you can build a complex combination of rules that will find the correct patients for your list.

Scan, Fax, or Print a Document into PCC EHR

/in /by

Before you can attach a document to patient’s chart, you need to load it into PCC EHR. You can use a scanner, a fax machine, or a “print to EHR” tool. Read below to learn how to import a document into PCC EHR.

Scan a File into PCC EHR

You can use a copier or a scanner to send files directly to PCC EHR.

PCC Support will help you configure each scanner or copier in your office to save documents to a specific folder. These documents are then in a File Source, available to attach to patient charts on the Import Documents screen.

Please speak with your office’s system administrator or a PCC Support technician about how to scan a document in your office.

Send a File to PCC EHR With “Print”

If you have an electronic document on your computer, you can use your computer’s print function to print the file directly to PCC EHR from any other program. You can find any file printed this way inside the EHR in the File Source “Printed to EHR”.

Print from any application


Find the documents in the “Printed to EHR” folder

Setting Up Print to EHR: If this feature is not set up on your workstation, you can follow these instructions to set up the feature yourself, or contact PCC Support.

Install “Print to EHR” Printer on Windows

Different versions of Windows:

The steps below show how to install the ‘Print to EHR’ printer on Windows 10 machines. These steps may be similar, but not an exact match to other versions of Windows. If you have questions at any point, please contact your office’s System Administrator, or PCC Support.

Open your “Devices and Printers” window

“Devices and Printers” is located in your control panel. You can search for it from the Windows Start menu.


Click Add Printer

Click “The printer that I want isn’t listed”

Select a shared printer by name

Select this option. In the text box, enter the following:
http://partner:631/printers/Print_to_EHR

warning: For some practices, you will have to use your practice’s IP address in place of “partner”. Please speak with your office’s System Administrator or PCC Support if you do not know your practice’s IP address.

Click OK

At the “No Driver Found” window, click “OK”

Choose Options

On the next screen, select “Generic” in the left pane. Then select “MS Publisher Imagesetter” in the right pane.

Click Next

Un-select Default Printer Option

At the final screen, be sure to un-select “Make this my default printer”. Then click Finish.

Install “Print to EHR” Printer on Mac OS

Open the System Preferences

Click on “Print & Scan”

Add a New Printer

At the bottom left of the “Printers” pane, click “+”

Fill Out The Fields

Click “IP” at the top of the window, and fill out the following fields:

  • Address: partner:631
  • Protocol: Internet Printing Protocol – IPP
  • Queue: /printers/Print_to_EHR
  • Name: Print to EHR
  • Location: EHR (this field can be anything)
  • Use: Generic PostScript Printer

warning: For some practices, you will have to use your practice’s IP address in place of “partner”. Please speak with your office’s System Administrator or PCC Support if you do not know your practice’s IP address.

Unable to Verify the Printer: You may get an Error “Unable to verify the printer on your network.” If so, click Continue. You will then be asked to setup options; click “OK”. The printer is now setup for use. Printing to this device should redirect output into the EHR

Faxes

Some fax machines have the ability to save an electronic version of incoming faxes. PCC can configure these devices to save files directly to the EHR, just like a scanner or copier.

If your fax machine does not have this feature, you can still receive faxes directly in PCC EHR. PCC integrates with Sfax, a third-party online service that securely receives and relays faxes from any sender.

When a hospital or vendor sends you a fax, it will appear in your Faxes file source in the Import Documents screen in PCC EHR, where you can attach it to a patient’s chart, and optionally attach it directly to a visit chart note or a specific order.

The Sfax service can port an existing local phone number for this purpose, or provide a new toll-free fax number when you sign up. This service has a per-page usage based fee involved.

Contact PCC Support at 802-846-8177 or 800-722-7708 to learn more about receiving faxes in PCC EHR.

Where is the Document in PCC EHR?

After you scan, print, or fax a document to PCC EHR, it will be stored in a folder or “File Source”.

You can take files from these folders and attach them to a patient’s chart, a specific visit, or even a specific lab or other order.

You can pick the file source on the Import Document screen.

Read more about importing documents to a patient’s chart..

Add a New PCC User Account

/in /by

When a new person joins your practice, an office manager or practice administrator needs to create a login for them in PCC. You might also create a new user account when an individual’s medical credentials have changed or they change their name. Read below to learn how.

Open the User Administration Tool

Click on the Tools menu and select “User Administration”.

Permissions: You must be an authorized user to use the User Administration tool. Contact PCC Support if you do not know which users at your practice are authorized.

Click “Add”

Click the “Add” button to begin adding a new user.

Enter Account Information

Use this screen to enter each variation on the user’s name, assign a username and password, enter licensing information, and indicate that the user can be assigned tasks. If the practice uses the Appointment Book, there will also be an option to allow scheduling of this user.

Pick a Username Carefully: You can come back to the User Administration tool to change most of the settings on this screen. However, when you click “Next” you will reserve a login username for the individual. That can not be changed later.

What are All These Different Fields Used For?: PCC EHR uses the different name fields in different contexts. For information about how and where each field is used in PCC EHR, read the Account Information Settings Reference.

Click “Next” to continue.

Select User Roles to Assign Permissions

Select one or more user roles. Roles set various attributes and grant users permission to use different functions in PCC EHR. Read the User Roles article for more information.

Click “Next” to continue.

Enable eRx Access, Role, and Permissions

Next, choose whether or not to enable eRx access for the new user, pick an eRx Prescriber Role, and then set the other eRx permissions.

All PCC EHR users can see a basic Medication History in a patient’s chart, typically on the Medical Summary. If a user also needs to review, update, and access additional medication management features, they will need access to PCC eRx. Use this screen to first enable the user’s eRx access, and then choose a role.

To learn more about the options on this screen, or to learn how to activate eRx access for existing users, read the Set Up PCC eRx User Access article.

Click “Next” to continue.

Review Name, Settings, and Click Create

Review the new user’s information and permissions carefully before clicking “Create” to make the account.

After an account is created, permissions and demographics can be changed. The username can not be changed.

Click “Create” to finalize account creation.

Have the New User Log In and Change Their Password

After you have created the user’s account, you should show them how to log in and provide their username and temporary password.

Instruct new users to change their password right away, using the My Account tool in the File menu.

Share Training Materials With the New User

You can use PCC’s new user outlines, or customize them to suit the needs of their role.

PCC’s Training Outlines by Role

Review Additional Configuration Steps for Clinicians

If you are adding a new user account for a clinical role, review the configuration steps in the Add and Configure a New Clinician to Your PCC System.

Optional: Choose an Alternate Display Name for Patient Portal Messages

Use the drop-down menu under User Information to select which name should appear in the “From” field of a patient portal message.

Once the name is selected, outgoing messages will show the Portal Display Name in the from field in patient portal.

In PCC EHR, messages will show the display name and the user’s full name.

Sign Up for PCC Community

If a new PCC user wants to be informed of important PCC announcements, or would like to connect with other PCC Users around the country, they should next sign up for PCC News on the PCC Community site.

You can sign up to PCC Community here: https://community.pcc.com/

When there are important service updates, PCC reaches out to someone at your practice, calling or e-mailing. You can guarantee that you’ll get important updates to PCC features and services by signing up for PCC Community.

PCC Community is a Great Place to Get Answers: In addition to providing notifications from PCC, PCC Community also includes PCC Talk, an online forum where pediatric practices ask questions and help one another with issues facing their practice.

For more information, watch the Get Started with PCC Community and PCC Talk video.

Change Passwords and Other User Account Settings

/in /by

Follow the procedure below to change a user’s PCC password or other settings, such as their name, NPI or other identifiers, or to disable a user’s account.

Watch a Video: Watch Manage User Accounts and Passwords to get started.

Change Your Password in the My Account Tool

While logged in to PCC EHR, all users can change their own passwords and other optional settings with the My Account tool in the File menu.


Before you make changes, double-check that you are logged in as the correct user. Then, enter a new password, confirm the new password, and click Save. PCC encourages all users to change their passwords periodically.

Password Security: Passwords must be at least 8 characters long, and they can not include common passwords, such as “password”, “1234” or the user’s username or real name.

Other My Account Tool Settings: Depending on your practice’s configuration, PCC EHR users can set other items on this screen. For example, they may see options for linking their Practice Management login credentials, their Direct Secure Messaging address, security questions for pocketPCC, and a pull-down menu that allows them to define custom Visit Status Counters.


Change Settings for Any User in the User Administration Tool

Follow the procedure below to change a user’s PCC EHR password and other account information in the User Administration tool.

Open the User Administration Tool

Click on the Tools menu and select “User Administration”.

Permissions: You must be an authorized user to use the User Administration tool. Contact PCC Support if you do not know which users at your practice are authorized.

Select a User and Click “Edit”

Double-click on the user’s name from the PCC EHR user list, or highlight their name and click “Edit”.

Enter a New Password, Name, or Enable or Disable the Account

Enter a new password twice to confirm. Passwords are case-sensitive. Click “Enable” or “Disable” to unlock or lock the user login.

You can use this screen to change other user account information. You may also see additional tabs for configuring Roles and special services, such as Direct Secure Messaging and eRx. For a complete reference to the fields and user attributes in this window, see below.

One Username and Password for All PCC Products and Services: A user’s PCC EHR username and password are the same for PCC EHR, pocketPCC, Practice Vitals Dashboard, Practice Management, and any other login to PCC products and services. The one exception is PCC Community, which users can sign up for individually.

Click Save

Click “Save” to save the user’s new password. All user changes take effect the next time the user logs in.

Click “Close”

Close the User Administration Tool.

Account Information Settings Reference


On the Account Information tab, you can change names, official identifiers such as a user’s NPI or DEA, and set other attributes for the user. Read below to learn about each option.

  • Names , Accounts, and Passwords: These names appear in PCC EHR in various situations where the user’s work is displayed.

    • First Name, Middle Name, Last Name, and Professional Suffix appear on prescriptions. PCC recommends that you do not use punctuation in the Professional Suffix field, as it may interfere with electronic prescribing. You can also choose to use First Name and Last Name for user selection lists.
    • Full Name appears in all drop-down task selection lists, next to all notes added by the user in visit chart notes, on the Rx Queue, and for providers who use the Appointment Book. It is also the default configuration for user selection lists.
    • Short Name can be used to indicate how the person is referred to within the office.
    • Username is the name that the user will use to log in to PCC EHR. It cannot be changed once an account is created.
    • Practice Management Username is a credential association with the under-the-hood Practice Management features. PCC EHR handles this field automatically.
    • Provider is a read-only field, for providers only, that links to Partner and identifies the provider associated with this username. This name is displayed on patient-facing visit summaries and in My Kids Chart.
    • Direct Address displays the clinicians address for Direct Secure Messaging, which other care providers can use to send PCC EHR CCDs and summaries of care, along with PDFs and other records.

  • Disable or Enable a User: If a user is marked as “Disabled”, they will no longer be able to log in, and they will not be visible in many drop-down lists in PCC EHR. Since a clinician who leaves your practice may still have incomplete tasks, disabled user accounts can still be assigned tasks or shown in task queue filters.

  • State License, NPI, and DEA: Enter a clinician’s unique identifiers. These identifiers may affect billing, electronic prescribing, and other PCC EHR features. Typically, you should enter the user’s unique NPI for prescribing, even if their visits are billed under a supervising provider.

  • Tasks: Use to indicate that a user can be assigned tasks by other users who are working with orders, phone notes, or documents.

  • Appointment Book: Used by practices that schedule with Appointment Book, to indicate that a provider can have appointments scheduled for them.

  • Visit Status Counters: You can configure which visit statuses will appear as Visit Status Counters in the lower-right of the user’s screen. The user can also configure that setting in the My Account tool.

Change a User’s Name, Medical Credentials, or Other Information

If you alter a user’s name or medical credentials, that same information will be altered for all records of that individual’s previous activity in PCC EHR.

For that reason, when a user changes their name or medical credentials, PCC recommends you create and configure a new user account.

Install and Configure PCC EHR on a New Computer

/in /by

PCC EHR runs on a large server at your practice or in the cloud. A small PCC EHR software program, called the “client” software, runs on each of your Windows PCs, or MacOS workstations.

How do you install the client software on a new laptop or desktop so it can connect to PCC EHR?

In Office: Under most circumstances, you can only install the PCC EHR software on a computer while it is located in your practice, working on your practice’s network. If you need to connect to your office remotely, you can use pocketPCC, or use PCC SecureConnect to connect through a browser window with 2-factor authentication.

Windows PC Installation Instructions

Follow the steps below to install PCC EHR software on a Windows PC.

Download the PCC EHR Installer

Open a Web browser and visit your server’s PCC downloads page. It gives you direct access to important PCC downloads, as well as links to PCC support and our online documentation at learn.pcc.com.

The url is simply your PCC acronym followed by pcc.com/downloads. So, if your acronym was ABCD, your downloads page would be at https://ABCD.pcc.com/downloads


In-Office Link: This link will work when your computer or workstation is connected to your office’s PCC network. If you use a third-party to manage your network, or need to connect to PCC EHR from a home office, contact your Client Advocate for download assistance.

Run the Installer

The setup application should run automatically. If it doesn’t, you can double-click on the icon in your downloads list.


Click through the PCC EHR Setup Wizard

You will see a PCC EHR installation guide. Simply click “Next” or “Install” to move through all steps.




Enter Password: Your computer may ask you for an administrative username and password. If you do not know it, consult your office manager or office system administrator.

Run PCC EHR Settings

The PCC EHR Settings program can be found by searching for “PCC EHR settings” in your Start menu.

Run As Administrator: You must right-click on the PCC EHR Settings application and choose to run it as an Administrator.



Enter Your Database Settings

Enter the database settings for your practice. Contact PCC Support at 1-800-722-1082 for assistance.

  • For “Host”, enter your practice’s PCC acronym.
  • For “Database User”, enter “ehruser”.
  • For “Database Password”, enter your practice’s database password.

Call or E-Mail for Help: If any of the above settings do not work at your practice, contact PCC Support for assistance.

Optional: Add PCC EHR to Your Task Bar

Since you will be using PCC EHR every day, you may want to add it to your computer’s task bar. Find the application icon (or the alias on your desktop) and drag it to the task bar.

Apple Macintosh (MacOS, Mac OSX) Installation Instructions

Follow the steps below to install PCC EHR software on an Apple Macintosh computer.

Download the PCC EHR Client

Open a Web browser and visit your server’s PCC downloads page. It gives you direct access to important PCC downloads, as well as links to PCC support and our online documentation at learn.pcc.com.

The url is simply your PCC acronym followed by pcc.com/downloads. So, if your acronym was ABCD, your downloads page would be at https://ABCD.pcc.com/downloads


Click the “PCC EHR Client” link to download PCC EHR.

In-Office Link: This link will work when your computer or workstation is connected to your office’s PCC network. If you use a third-party to manage your network, or need to connect to PCC EHR from a home office, contact PCC Support for download assistance.

Run the Installer

The setup application should run automatically. If it doesn’t, you can double-click on the icon in your downloads list.

Macintosh Disk Image and Packages: You may need to pop-open a disk image (.dmg file) and double-click on a package:

Click through the PCC EHR Installer

You will see a PCC EHR installation guide. Simply click “Next” or “Install” to move through all steps. PCC EHR may launch automatically when you are finished.

Enter Password: Your computer may ask you for an administrative username and password. If you do not know it, consult your office manager or office system administrator.

Run PCC EHR Settings

The PCC EHR Settings program is located in the Applications folder on a Macintosh. Find PCC EHR Settings and run it.

Administrative Permission: Changing your PCC EHR settings requires an administrative account on your workstation. You may need to open the Terminal application, located in the Utilities folder in the Applications folder, and then run sudo /Applications/PCC\ EHR\ Settings.app/Contents/MacOS/PCC\ EHR\ Settings. Contact PCC Support for assistance.

Enter Your Database Settings

Enter the database settings for your practice.


Macs running the Sequoia operating system may require additional steps when installing PCC EHR for the first time. Contact PCC Support at 1-800-722-1082 for assistance.

Optional: Add PCC EHR to Your Dock or Task Bar

Since you will be using PCC EHR every day, you may want to add it to your computer’s dock. Find the application icon and drag it to the appropriate location.

On the Macintosh, you can find the PCC EHR.app application in the Applications folder.

Health Information Summary Report

/in /by

You can generate a paper or electronic copy of a patient’s health record with the Health Information Summary Report.

Health Information Summary for Transitions of Care?: For a summary of care record, for a referral or other transition of care, use the more complete and C-CDA formatted Summary of Care Record report. The Health Information Summary is a less formal chart summary for patient, family, and clinician use. The PCC 7.0 update removed the outbound transition of care selection options from the Health Information Summary report.

View the Report

Open a patient chart and select “Health Information Summary” from the Reports menu.


The report includes basic patient demographics and information from the patient’s Medical Summary screen, such as problems, allergies, and medication history. It also includes labs (and all results), screenings, radiology, and medical tests in the patient chart.

Save as PDF or Print the Report

Click “Save as PDF…” to open your computer’s standard Save dialog window.

Click “Print” to open your computer’s standard Print dialog window.


Patient Reminders

/in /by

PCC EHR can create reminder lists of patients based on complex criteria. You can save those criteria as Patient Reminders that you can re-run at any time, and generate a contact file.

Your office can create unique Patient Reminders that help you review and work with your patient population. You could export reminder lists for:

  • Patients needing certain forms mailed to them, based on age, flag, or medical condition
  • Patients who have not had a Well Child diagnosis in the past year
  • Patients with certain diagnoses or medications

Permissions: Only specified users may access the Patient Reminders report tool. If you do not have access, contact your practice’s PCC EHR system administrator or PCC Support.

View and Output a Patient Reminder

Click on the Reports menu and select Patient Reminders to open the Patient Reminders reporting tool.


Select any patient reminder and click “Generate Reminder” to view the output.



While you review the matching patients, you can click on any column header to sort the list by that column.

Contact Information: By default, PCC EHR used the patient’s custodial address as the contact information. If the patient has a different “Confidential Contact” listed in the Demographics section of their chart, that will appear here instead.

Export Patient Reminders: Click Save as File to save the patient reminder list to a file. You can then open the file in OpenOffice.org, Excel, or any other spreadsheet program. You can also use the file for mail merge.

Review Log and Mark Reminders as Sent

Use the Reminder Log tab to review previous reminder runs that you saved to file. You can open a log and mark reminders as sent, in order to record that you contacted the patient or family.


Create or Edit a Patient Reminder

Select a reminder and click “Add” or “Edit” to create or edit a reminder. Either action opens the Patient Reminder Editor screen.


Note: You can also reach the edit screen by clicking “Edit Criteria” while generating a reminder.

Basic Reminder Settings

When creating or editing a patient reminder, you can configure the following items:

  • Patient Reminder Name: Enter or edit the reminder’s name.

  • Criteria Time Frame: Set the general time frame for all the criteria that apply to the reminder.

Reminder Criteria

The criteria section determines which patients will be included and excluded when you generate the reminder.

You can add criteria in a number of different categories.

Choose a category and then click “Add” or “Edit” to configure criteria. For example, if you wanted to include all patients with specific lab test results, you would add a Lab Test Results criteria.


As you enter the details for a new criteria, new blank lines will appear below for adding additional “OR” criteria in that section.

Demographics and Vitals: When you add a demographics or vitals criteria, the screen will prompt you to first select a specific criterion (age, height, etc) and then click Add to create criteria.


Selecting Patients Under a Percentile: For Vitals criteria, you can add values based on percentiles, such as patients under a certain percentile for weight or height.

Chronic, and Other Patient Flags: Does your office use Partner patient flags to classify patients with certain needs? You can use the Patient Flags criteria (found in the Demographics section) to identify patients who have, or do not have, certain flags.

Deceased Status: Use the Deceased patient status criteria to exclude deceased patients from the results. You can find it in the Demographics criteria section.

By mixing and matching criteria, you can build a complex combination of rules that will find the correct patients for the reminder.

Co-Sign Visit Chart Notes

/in /by

If your office uses co-signing, an optional feature in PCC EHR, then some clinicians may require another physician to co-sign their visit chart notes.

First, the user signs the chart themselves, either from within the chart or from the Signing queue.

They must indicate which provider is responsible for co-signing their charts. PCC EHR remembers their last answer and fills it out for them automatically.

Next, the co-signing or supervising physician uses the Signing queue to review a list of charts that require their co-signing.

They can double-click on an entry, review the visit, and click “Co-Sign”.

Both signer and co-signer will be recorded and displayed in the patient’s Visit History, and on the Schedule screen.

The signer can also see, right on the schedule screen, any visits that still require their signature.

Turn On and Configure Co-Signing: You can learn how to turn on and configure co-signing in the PCC EHR Configuration help section.

Run the Clinical Quality Measures Report

/in , /by

The Clinical Quality Measures report in PCC EHR calculates your clinicians’ performance on CMS Clinical Quality Measures.

Follow the procedure below to use the report.

More About PCMH, CQMs, Meaningful Use Measures and Incentive Programs: For more information, check out the PCMH, CQMs, Measures, and Incentive Programs section of PCC Learn.

CQM Criteria Have Changed: Criteria and qualifying procedures for CQMs have changed. This report is still a useful way to measure how your practice addresses these measures:
• Children Who Have Dental Decay or Cavities
• Appropriate Testing for Children with Pharyngitis
• Chlamydia Screening for Women
• Weight Assessment and Counseling for Nutrition and Physical Activity for Children and Adolescents
For other CQMs, you should review your activity in the Practice Vitals Dashboard, order reports in the PCC EHR Report Library, or use another method.

Configure Your System and Adjust Chart Policies

The Clinical Quality Measures report depends on charting and coding in PCC EHR. You may need to adjust how you code and chart visits in order for PCC EHR to properly evaluate your CQM percentages.

Read Clinical Quality Measures with PCC EHR to learn more.

Time Period: After your practice makes configuration and workflow changes, you may need to wait 90 days in order for the Clinical Quality Measures report to fully reflect how your office addresses each measure.

Click “Reports” and Select “Clinical Quality Measures”

The Clinical Quality Measures report is in the Reports menu.

Select Measures, Reporting Period, Eligible Professionals, and Report Layout

On the Clinical Quality Measures report criteria screen, you can adjust options for output before you generate the report.

  • 2014 or 2011 Edition: You can select either the 2014 or 2011 Edition CQM rules by clicking on a tab at the top of the screen. Note that the 2011 CQM rules have been retired and that practices can no longer apply for the EHR Medicaid Incentive Program or for PCMH recognition using the 2011 rules.

  • Limit Measures: By default, the Clinical Quality Measures report will evaluate your practice’s data for the nine CMS recommended pediatric CQMs. You can click “Edit” in the Measures criteria section to limit measures that will appear on the report. These nine measures are appropriate for both the EHR Medicaid Incentive program and for PCMH applications.

  • Reporting Period: For 2015, your EHR Medicaid Incentive Program application or PCMH application will probably use a 90-day reporting period. For 2016 and beyond, a full calendar year may be required. You can set any 90-day period, any calendar year, or input a custom reporting period.

    • Do not use a reporting period that extends before the date you went live with PCC EHR. Some of the data needed to properly calculate CQMs can not be obtained through data conversions.
    • If you have added chart note components or made charting policy changes at your practice in order to record data for CQMs, you should use a reporting period after you made those changes.

  • Eligible Professionals: Click “Edit” in the Eligible Professionals criteria section to select providers for the report. For example, for the EHR Medicaid Incentive Program, you will run reports for professionals that perform at least 20% Medicaid visits. Contact PCC Support for help determining the Medicaid volume of the clinicians at your practice. For PCMH, you should select all providers (NP, PA, MD, DOs, etc.) However, for both PCMH and EHR Medicaid Incentive Program applications, you should use this criteria to exclude generic or “nurse” provider entries.

  • Report Layout: The EHR Medicaid Incentive program application requires data for each eligible professional. A PCMH recognition application requires a practice aggregate report.

Once you set the report criteria and generate the report, PCC will remember your settings and restore them each time you open the Clinical Quality Measures Report.

Who Did What in PCC EHR?: As you review data for each eligible professional, keep in mind that 2014 Clinical Quality Measure calculations use the “Provider of Encounter” for each visit. The PoE appears at the top of each chart note, and by default is the scheduled provider. 2011 calculations were based on the clinician who signed the visit.

Click “Generate Report”

After you make your selections, click “Generate Report”.


The Clinical Quality Measures report examines details from hundreds or thousands of charts and may take several minutes to run. You may prefer to run it after-hours, when your system is less busy.

Review Report Results

The Clinical Quality Measures report will calculate and display your practice’s numbers for each measure, either as an aggregate report or per-provider.

For each Clinical Quality Measure, you can see the CMS and NQF code, a description of the measure and any components that make up the measure, followed by your practice’s results.

  • Numerator and Denominator: Most CQM results display a number of patients who meet the requirements or goal of the measure (the “Numerator” column), as well as the total number of patients who were billed a visit code during the reporting period (the “Denominator” column).

  • Performance Rate: Next, the “Performance Rate” column displays your practice’s percentage for the measure, calculated by dividing the numerator by the denominator.

  • Exclusions or Exceptions: The final two columns display the total number of any patients who met certain CQM-specific exclusions or exceptions. For example, if a patient was pregnant during the reporting period, they will show up in the Denominator but appear in the Exclusions column instead of the Numerator for the Weight Assessment CQM.

Interpreting Your Results: The philosophical goal of Clinical Quality Measures is to improve them over time. A low score or a zero score does not indicate that your practice or an eligible professional have failed to meet the measure–there is no success threshold. A higher percentage may mean that your practice is doing better at meeting the goals of the measure, but an improved percentage over time is the true goal. One exception to the “higher is better” rule is the “Children Who Have Dental Decay or Cavities” measure, for which a smaller percentage is desirable.

How Do I Chart and Configure PCC EHR to Affect Each Line? How Is Each Line Calculated? What Are the Exceptions and Exclusions?: Clinical Quality Measures compare activity during a visit, including how medical issues are recorded in a chart note, patient prescriptions, etc., with the diagnoses and procedures you record for a visit. For more information on how each line of the Clinical Quality Measure report is calculated, and to learn what changes you can make in your PCC workflow to improve your percentile score, read the Clinical Quality Measures in PCC EHR article.

Optional: Drill-Down to Per-Patient Details

Click “Details” for any measure to review patient-level details for the results.


Details for the report and the selected measure appear at the top. On the left, you can specify what portion of the patient population you wish to review (Numerator, Denominator, or All patients).

Click on any patient on the left to review what occurred for them to be counted in the denominator or the numerator on the right.

By reviewing patient records to see why they were or were not included in a measure’s calculation, you can address potential problems in your patient workflow or PCC configuration that may alter your final percentage.

Optional: Output the Report

Click “Save as PDF” or “Print” to output a copy of the CQM results.

What is eReporting?: Click “eReporting” to create a digital file containing your CQM results in QRDA Category 3 format. Some agencies may support uploading results so you do not have to retype them in order to apply for an incentive program. This feature is in pilot testing. Please consult PCC Support if you’d like to try this feature.

Patient Visit Summary Report

/in /by

The Patient Visit Summary is an “end-of-visit” clinical summary report. It details everything that happened during an appointment or other encounter. The report optionally includes an overview of other patient medical information. You can also customize what appears on the report and configure special components which will include patient instructions and other information.

This report is a feature required for HHS ONC certification, and by providing it you meet a Meaningful Use Measure.

Generate the Patient Visit Summary Report

While reviewing a chart note click the Print button at the top to open the report and automatically select that visit.

Alternatively, after you open a patient chart (or phone note, portal message, or other message protocol), select “Patient Visit Summary” from the Reports menu.

Select Options For the Patient Visit Summary

Before you generate the report, you can select the visit encounter (if other than today) and optionally change what information will appear on the report output.

Your practice’s default settings will appear, and you can add or remove items using the checkboxes in the Customize panel on the left-hand side of the window. For example, you can decide to add or remove Medications, Vitals, or other visit information based on whether or not that information is relevant to the visit.

As you make changes, the report preview will display a text-only view of the report’s contents. Report attachments, such as the patient care plans, will not appear in the preview.

Hidden Diagnoses in the Patient Chart: Any diagnoses that are hidden or “locked” will not display in the Patient Visit Summary. To get a report that contains these diagnoses, use the Summary of Care Record.

Display ICD-10 for Referral or Lab Requisitions: Some practices use the Patient Visit Summary to help communicate about an order. For example, you might use it as a lab requisition form. As you customize what appears on the report, you can indicate that it should include the Diagnoses, along with the ICD-10 codes, to help communicate to a third party or biller.

Save or Print the Report

After you select options for the report, click “Save as…” or “Print” to output the Patient Visit Summary.

If you select print, your computer’s standard print dialog window will open. If you select “Save as…” option, you will be prompted to save the PDF. You can later attach the PDF to portal message, an e-mail, or similar.

Export the Report as a C-CDA File

Your practice can also save a Patient Visit Summary in the C-CDA Clinical Summary xml file format for transmission to other medical practices.

When you generate a Patient Visit Summary, click “Save as…” to create a file. In the file type pull-down menu, you can choose either a PDF file or a C-CDA xml file.

629pcc16629pcc17

Configuration, Include, Exclude: Your practice can set report defaults and make modifications to what appears in the Patient Visit Summary. The C-CDA will reflect your changes. Labs and orders that are marked to be private and not appear on patient reports will not be included in the C-CDA file.

Record that a Patient’s Family Declined the Patient Visit Summary

You can record when a patient or guardian declined to receive a Patient Visit Summary report for the day’s appointment.

Click on the Decline button to indicate the patient or guardian did not want the Patient Visit Summary.

629pcc14

Alternatively, you can click Decline inside the Patient Visit Summary window.

629pcc15

Why Would You Record That a Family Declined the Patient Visit Summary?: In order to meet Meaningful Use benchmarks or other mandate programs, your practice mght offer a Patient Visit Summary for each visit. Since the family may say, “no thanks”, you can click “Decline” to record their refusal and save the paper and ink for the report. PCC EHR will record the act of declining the report in the chart’s background event log. Your results on the Meaningful Use report will indicate that the family was offered the report.

Configure the Patient Visit Summary Report

Use the Patient Visit Summary Configuration tool to configure what will appear on the Patient Visit Summary by default.


Configure Which Office Contact Information Should Appear

First, you can set what location information should appear at the top of the visit summary. Should your practice’s location information appear, or the information for the visit’s scheduled location?


Configure Your Addresses: Your practice’s main address is configured in the Practice Information section of the Configuration Editor (ced). You can edit your other location addresses in the Places of Service table in the Table Editor (ted). Before you adjust this feature, you may want to review your Places of Service table and update addresses and phone numbers. Contact PCC Support for help with these Partner configuration tools.

Configure Problem List Notes

If your visit summary is going to include the patient’s problems from the Problem List, you can indicate whether the problem notes should appear as well.


Customize Other Report Content

You can configure what visit information and other patient information should appear on the visit summary.

For example, your practice may want future appointments and orders to appear, but you may decide that allergies and care plan information should not appear on the default Patient Visit Summary. Also, if your practice uses the Patient Visit Summary as a lab requisition form, or to communicate encounter information with other third-parties, you may want to check the “Display ICD-10” checkbox.

Customization Does Not Override Confidential Orders: The customization features allow you to display or hide orders from the Patient Visit Summary report. However, if a specific order’s “Include on Patient Reports” checkbox is deselected, that order will not appear on the Patient Visit Summary even when Orders are selected.

Configure Chief Complaint and Clinical Instructions

If you would like the visit’s Chief Complaint or Clinical Instructions to appear on the Patient Visit Summary report, you must configure which chart note components your practice uses to track that information during a visit.

In the example above, the practice indicated that any charted information in the generic Chief Complaint or custom “Chief Complaint–asthma” components should appear as the patient’s Chief Complaint on the Patient Visit Summary report. The practice has also indicated two different Plan components that should appear as Clinical Instructions.

You can add or remove any chart note components that you would like to appear on the Patient Visit Summary report as Chief Complaint or as Clinical Instructions. When you generate the report, PCC EHR will use any information it finds in the assigned components for the visit.